GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 18i-LNA

Connection Manual (Hardware)

GFZ-63393EN/02 February 2003

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 2003 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–63393EN/02 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s–1
B–63393EN/02 PREFACE

PREFACE

This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

for connecting the CNC control unit to a machine tool. The manual
outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC control units,
as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and supplies
additional information on using these components. Refer to individual
manuals for the detailed specifications of each component.
Connect and install devices according to the instructions in this
connection manual.
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are:
Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 18i–LNA 18i–LNA

p–1
PREFACE B–63393EN/02

Organization of this This manual consists of chapters 1 through 14 and appendixes.

manual

Chapter No. and title Description

CHAPTER 1 Summarizes connection of the Series 18i–LNA and provides a guideline to detail
CONFIGURATION information.

CHAPTER 2 Describes how to connect the Series 18i–LNA and peripheral units.
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

CHAPTER 3 Describes the conditions for installing the Series 18i–LNA.

INSTALLATION 1) Power supply capacity
2) Heat output
3) Connector locations on the control unit
4) Action against noise

CHAPTER 4 Describes the connection of the power supply of the Series 18i–LNA.
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

CHAPTER 5 Describes how to connect the Series 18i–LNA and the following peripheral units:
CONNEDCTION TO CNC 1) LCD unit
PERIPHERALS
2) Input/output unit (RS–232–C)

CHAPTER 6 Describes how to connect the Series 18i–LNA and spindle–related units.
SPINDLE CONNECTION

CHAPTER 7 Describes how to connect the Series 18i–LNA and servo units.
SERVO INTERFACE

CHAPTER 8 Describes how to connect machine interface I/O signals through FANUC I/O Link.
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

CHAPTER 9 Describes how to use the emergency stop signal.

EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL All users must read this chapter.

CHAPTER 10 Describes the high–speed serial bus (HSSB) that can be used with the Series
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) 18i–LNA.

CHAPTER 11 Describes how to connect the I/O signals on the PLC interface board.
PLC INTERFACE BOARD

CHAPTER 12 Describes the DeviceNet board.

DeviceNet BOARD

CHAPTER 13 Describes the FL–net board.

FL–net BOARD

CHAPTER 14 Describes the M–NET board.

M–NET BOARD

APPENDIX A) External dimensions of each unit

B) 20–pin interface connectors and cables
C) Connection cable
D) Optical cable
E) Touch panel for 10.4” LCD unit (with the touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)
F) PCMCIA interface

p–2
B–63393EN/02 PREFACE

Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to Series 18i–LNA.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
Table 1 Manuals Related

Specification
Manual name
Number
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–63393EN *
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–63393EN–1

OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63394EN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63395EN

PARAMETER MANUAL B–63400EN

Related manuals of
SERVO MOTOR α series Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR α series, β series

Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL B–65150E

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65152E

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series B–65160E

PARAMETER MANUAL

FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65162E

FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65165E

Manuals related to The following lists the manuals related to the network.
network Drawing
Manual name
number

FANUC DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63404EN

FANUC FL–net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63434EN

FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board B–63354EN

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Manuals related to I/O The following lists the manuals related to the I/O.
Drawing
Manual name
number

FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A B–61813E

CONNECTION MAINTENANCE MANUAL

p–3
PREFACE B–63393EN/02

Related manuals for The information about the PMC in this connection manual covers only the
PMC specifications unique to the PMC of the FANUC Series 18i–LNA. For
other PMC specifications, refer to the following manuals:
Drawing
Manual name
number

FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ B–61863E

SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6
Ladder Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL

p–4
B–63393EN/02 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1

1. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Configurations of Stand–alone Type Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.1 WHEN THE 10.4″ LCD UNIT
(WITH TOUCH PANEL AND OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O) IS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2 WHEN THE DETACHABLE LCD/MDI IS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1 ENVIRONMENT FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2.1 Power Supply Capacities of CNC–related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4.3 Heat Output of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.4.4 Thermal Design of Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.5.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.5.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.5.3 Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.5.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.6 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.6.1 Installing the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.7 CABLING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.2 TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2.1 Power Supply for the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2.2 Specifications and Circuit Configuration of External 24–VDC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2.3 Power–on Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.2.4 Power–off Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.3 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.4 BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.4.1 Battery for Memory Backup (3VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.4.2 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

c–1
 Table of Contents B–63393EN/02

5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

5.1 CONNECTION WITH THE LCD UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.1.2 Connection with the 10.4″ LCD Unit (with the Touch Panel and Operator’s Panel I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.1.3 Connection with the Detachable LCD/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.2 CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.2.2 RS–232–C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.2.3 RS–232–C Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

6. SPINDLE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6.1 SERIAL SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.1.1 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

7. SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.1 SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.1.2 Interface to the Servo Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.1.3 Connecting the Servo Check Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

8.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.2 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
8.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.3 UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8.4 I/O CONNECTION OF THE SERIES 18i–LNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8.5 CONNECTION OF THE CONNECTOR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.5.2 Connector Panel I/O Modules Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.5.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.5.4 Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.5.5 Connection Example of Relay Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.5.6 I/O Link Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.5.7 Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.5.7.1 Pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.5.7.2 Input signal connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.5.7.3 Output signal connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
8.5.8 Input/Output Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8.5.9 2 A Output DO Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.5.10 Outline Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8.5.11 Checking the Input and Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8.5.12 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.5.13 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8.6 OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O CONNECTION FOR 10.4″ LCD UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.6.1 Connector Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.6.2 Overall Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.6.3 I/O Link Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
8.6.4 Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
8.6.5 I/O Connector Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
8.6.6 Input Signal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.6.7 Output Signal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

c–2
B–63393EN/02 Table of Contents

8.6.8 Wiring Inside the Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

8.6.9 Connection of a Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.6.10 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.6.11 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
8.7 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
8.7.1 Overall Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
8.7.2 Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
8.7.3 Manual Pulse Generator Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8.7.4 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
8.7.5 External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
8.7.6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
8.7.7 Other Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
8.8 CONNECTION OF FANUC I/O LINK–AS–I CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.8.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.8.1.1 Strong point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.8.1.2 Ordering specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.8.1.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.8.1.4 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.8.1.5 Heat value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.8.1.6 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.8.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.8.2.1 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.8.2.2 Outer dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.8.2.3 Arrangement of connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8.8.2.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8.8.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8.8.3.1 General connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8.8.3.2 Connecting Input power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
8.8.3.3 Power turn–on/off sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
8.8.3.4 Connection of AS–i terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
8.8.4 DI/DO Map on the I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.8.5 Details of I/O Link DI/DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8.8.5.1 input / output data area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8.8.5.2 AS–i status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
8.8.5.3 List of slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8.8.6 Command Execution by the Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.8.6.1 Commands that can be executed from the ladder program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.8.6.2 Command interface of ladder program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.8.6.3 Details of command flag and status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.8.6.4 Error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.8.6.5 An order of command handshake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.8.6.6 Details of commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.8.7 LED Display and Setting Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.8.7.1 LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.8.7.2 7 segments LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.8.7.3 Setting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.8.8 Dealing with Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.8.9 How to use I/O Link – AS–i Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.8.9.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.8.9.2 Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

c–3
 Table of Contents B–63393EN/02

8.8.10 CE Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

9. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

10.HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

10.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.2 CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.3 PERSONAL COMPUTER SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.4 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.5 PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE BOARDS . . . . . . . . 174
10.6 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.7 RECOMMENDED CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

11.PLC INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

11.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
11.2 PLC BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
11.3 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

12.DEVICENET BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

12.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12.2 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12.4 SLAVE AND MASTER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12.5 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
12.6 REFRESH TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12.7 CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12.8 ATTACHING/DETACHING DeviceNet BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

13.FL–net BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

13.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
13.2 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
13.3 MONITORING PARTICIPATING AND SEPARATED NODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
13.4 MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

14.M–NET BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

14.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14.2 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14.3 INTERFACE CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
14.4 CABLE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT AND CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

c–4
B–63393EN/02 Table of Contents

B.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

B.2 ADDITIONAL TARGET MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
B.3 BOARD–MOUNTED CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
B.3.1 Vertical–type Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
B.3.2 Straight and Right–angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw–fixing Connector Housings) . . . . . . . . 250
B.4 CABLE CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
B.5 RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

D. OPTICAL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

E. 10.4″ LCD UNIT (WITH TOUCH PANEL AND OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O) . . . . . 279

F. PCMCIA INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

c–5
B–63393EN/02 1. CONFIGURATION

1 CONFIGURATION

1
1. CONFIGURATION B–63393EN/02

1.1 The configuration and component names of each control unit are shown
in the figures given below. This manual explains how to attach the
CONTROL UNIT connectors shown in these figures to devices. The numbers in parentheses
CONFIGURATION ( ) in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in this
AND COMPONENT manual. The numbers in brackets [ ] in the figures are connector numbers.
NAMES

1.1.1 Series 18i–LNA control units

Configurations of Slot rack name Option slot Mini slot
Stand–alone Type
Single–slot rack None 2
Control Units
3–slot rack 2 2

Series 18i–LNA display units

Display Soft key Graphic display

10.4″ LCD unit (with

touch panel and None Provided
operator’s panel I/O)

Detachable LCD/MDI Provided None

2
B–63393EN/02 1. CONFIGURATION

Control unit

Battery
(4.4)

Status display LED

RS–232–C
connector (5.2)
[JD5A]

I/O Link connector

Slot 3 Slot 2 (8) [JD1A]

PCMCIA
interface

Connector for serial

spindle (6) [JA41]

Connector for display

link (5.1) [JD45]

Mini slot Power supply

(Cannot used) connector (4)
[CP1, CP2]

LED indicator for

maintenance

Mini slot Rotary switch for

(Cannot used) maintenance

Connector for 10.4″

LCD unit (5)
[COP20A]

Servo check board

connector (7)
[CA54]

Mini slot Slot 2 Mini slot Slot 1 Servo unit (FSSB)

Ground terminal
Install an option board Install an option board connector (7)
for signal
for the higher net. for the lower net. [COP10A]

3
1. CONFIGURATION B–63393EN/02

Control unit

Sub–CPU board (Option)

PLC interface board (Option)

Connector for I/O

(11) [(C80)]

Connector for serial

spindle (6) [JA41] Connector for I/O
(11) [(C81)]

Servo check board

connector (7) [CA54]

Servo unit (FSSB)

connector (7)
[COP10A]

4
B–63393EN/02 1. CONFIGURATION

Control unit (mini slots)

HSSB board

HSSB optical
connector (10)

FL–net board

FL–net connector

DeviceNet board

DeviceNet
connector

M–NET board

M–NET
connector

Ethernet board

Ethernet
connector

5
1. CONFIGURATION B–63393EN/02

Installing option boards When option boards such as the FL–net board, DeviceNet board, and
M–NET board are used, they must be installed in the mini slots by the
machine tool builder.
Install an option board used for the higher net in the upper mini slot, and
install an option board for the lower net in the lower mini slot.

Control unit

Mini slot for

the higher net

Mini slot for

the lower net

Installation example

PLC

Higher net

FL–net FL–net FL–net

18i-LNA 18i-LNA 18i-LNA FL–net

board
Device Device Device
Net Net Net
DeviceNet
board
Lower net

I/O I/O I/O

6
B–63393EN/02 1. CONFIGURATION

10.4″ LCD unit

(with a touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)

Liquid crystal display

(touch panel)

PCMCIA
interface

Connector for
connection of I/O
signals of operator’s
panel (8) [CE56]

Connector for I/O Link

(upper) connection (8)
[JD1A]

Connector for I/O link

(lower) connection (8)
[JD1B]

Connector for manual

pulse generator (8)
[JA60]

Power supply Protective

LCD connector connector (5)
(5) [COP20B] Fuse grounding (PE)
[CP1A (right)] terminal
[CP1B (left)]

7
1. CONFIGURATION B–63393EN/02

1.2
HARDWARE
OVERVIEW

Main CPU board

CPU for controlling CNC

· Power supply
· Spindle interface
· I/O Link
· PMC–SB6
· RS–232–C
· Six–axis servo control
· PCMCIA interface
· Display interface

To slot 1

PLC interface board To slot 2

PLC interface and I/O

Sub–CPU board Option Option Slot 1

slot 3 slot 2
To slot 3
Sub–CPU for 2–path control
· Four–axis servo control
· Spindle interface

Mini slot
HSSB interface board To mini
slot 1 or 2
High–speed serial bus interface
(personal computer interface)
Mini slot
FL–net board
FL–net function

DeviceNet board
1– or 3–slot cabinet
DeviceNet function

M–NET board
M–NET function

Ethernet board
Ethernet function

8
B–63393EN/02 2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

2 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

9
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B–63393EN/02

2.1
WHEN THE 10.4″ LCD
UNIT (WITH TOUCH
PANEL AND
OPERATOR’S PANEL
I/O) IS USED
Control unit
Main CPU board
Slot 1

24V–IN(CP1) 24 VDC power supply

24V–OUT(CP2)
LCD unit (touch panel)

Optical cable
LCD(COP20A) COP20B
Manual pulse generator
CP1A CA55

CP1B JA60
JD1B CE56 Operator’s
panel
JD1A
Memory card
Connector panel
(connector panel I/O module)
JD1A CE62
JD1A JD1B CE63 Power
magnetics
CE64 cabinet
XT1

R232–1(JD5A) RS–232C I/O unit

SPDL&POS(JA41) Circuit breaker

200 VAC
AC reactor
200 VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 JX1B
Position coder

CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A

JA7B SPM JY2
TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B
Servo card
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor

Optical cable TB1 CX2A JX1A

FSSB(COP10A) COP10B TB2 Axis 1 servo motor
SVM
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
COP10B Axis 2 servo motor
SVM
COP10A

COP10B Axis 3 servo motor

SVM
COP10A

COP10B Axis 4 servo motor

SVM
COP10A

Up to six axis, (In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)

SV–CHK(CA54) Servo check board

10
B–63393EN/02 2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

Control unit
slot 2

PLC interface board

(C80)
Power magnetics cabinet
(C81)
slot 3

Sub–CPU board

SPDL&POS(JA41)

PSM Position coder

Spindle motor

SPM

Servo card
To second spindle

FSSB(COP10A) Sub axis 1

COP10B servo motor
Optical cable SVM
COP10A

Sub axis 2
COP10B servo motor
SVM
COP10A

Sub axis 3
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A

Sub axis 4
COP10B servo motor
SVM
COP10A

Up to four axes.

SV–CHK(CA54) Servo check board

HSSB board
Mini slot

HSSB(COP70) Personal Computer

Optical cable
Mini slot Mini slot Mini slot Mini slot

DeviceNet board
To another device
(TBL)
FL–net board
(CD38N) To another device
NOTE: Up to two option boards for
M–NET board mini slots can be installed.
(TR) To another device

Ethernet board
(CD38L) To another device

11
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B–63393EN/02

2.2
WHEN THE
DETACHABLE
LCD/MDI IS USED

Main board
24V–IN(CP1) 24 VDC
24 VDC power supply

24V–OUT(CP2)
Detachable
LCD/MDI

CA66
100 to 200VAC CA63
power supply
JD45 CA61
(CRT Link) CPA

I/O module for

operator ’s panel
JA3 Manual pulse generator
I/O Link
JD1A JD1B
JD1A

NOTE: For other connnections, see Section 2.1.

12
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

3 INSTALLATION

13
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

3.1
ENVIRONMENT FOR
INSTALLATION

3.1.1 The peripheral units and the control unit have been designed on the
Environmental assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual
“cabinet” refers to the following:
Requirements
D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
control unit or peripheral units;
D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the control unit or operator’s panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table.
10.4″ LCD unit
(with a touch Other types
Condition
panel and oper- of unit
ator’s panel I/O)

In operation 0°C to 58°C 0°C to 55°C

Ambient
Temperature In store or
–20°C to 60°C
transportation

Relative
30% to 95% (no condensation)
humidity

In operation 0.5 G or less

Vibration In store or trans-
1.0 G or less
portation

In operation Up to 1000 m
Meters above
sea level In store or trans-
Up to 12000 m
portation

Inter of units: Each unit should be placed in a cabinet to keep

it from pollutants (such as dust, coolant, organic solvents,
acid, corrosive gas, amd salt).
Environment
Heat sink of outer of cabinet: The heat sinks should be
protected from direct exposure to coolant, lubricant, and
metal chips.

If a unit is to be used in an environment where it is likely to

Radiation
be exposed to radiations (such as microwave, ultraviolet
(ionizing or
rays, laser beams, and X–rays), a shielding provision
nonionizing)
should be available for it.

Section 3.3 describes the installation and design conditions of a cabinet

satisfying these conditions.

14
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

3.2
POWER SUPPLY
CAPACITY

3.2.1 The following CNC–related units require an input power supply that
Power Supply satisfies the indicated current capacities with a power supply voltage of
24 VDC "10%. Here, note that momentary voltage changes and ripples
Capacities of are also within "10% of the power supply voltage.
CNC–related Units
Table 3.2.1 (a) Power supply capacity (for control units)

Power supply
Unit Remarks
capacity

Control unit 1–slot rack 1.8A (*1, *2)

(including main
CPU board) 3–slot rack 1.8A (*1, *2)

HSSB board 0.2A

Sub–CPU board 0.8A

FL–net board 0.3A

DeviceNet board 0.2A

M–NET board 0.3A

Ethernet board 0.3A

PLC interface board 1.5A (*4)

10.4″ LCD unit (with touch panel and 1.35A (*3)

operator’s panel I/O)

NOTE
1 Boards in option slots and mini slots are not included.
2 When an RS–232–C unit (with power supplied form the NC)
is connected to the RS–232–C port, +1 A is further required.
3 Use memory cards that consume no more than 2 W.
4 The PLC mounted on the PLC interface board is also
included.

Table 3.2.1 (b) Power supply rating (peripheral units)

Unit Power supply capacity Remarks

MDI unit 0A

Operator’s panel I/O 0.35A

module

Connector panel I/O 0.2A+7.3mA×DI

module (basic)

Connector panel I/O 0.1A+7.3mA×DI

module (additional)

15
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

3.3 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
DESIGN AND screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
INSTALLATION considered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
CONDITIONS OF THE D The cabinet must be fully closed.
MACHINE TOOL The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne
MAGNETIC CABINET dust,coolant,and organic solvent.
D The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature of
each unit is not exceeded. For actual heat design, see Section 3.4.
D A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.)
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.

CAUTION
If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easily
adheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail. (This
is not necessary for a unit with fan.)

D For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between

each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
D Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in order
to seal the cabinet.
D The display unit must not be installed in such a place that coolant
would directly fall onto the unit. The control unit has a dust–proof
front panel, but the unit should not be placed in a location where
coolant would directly fall onto it.
D Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts that
generate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in the
magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design
to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted
to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.6 for details of noise
elimination/management.
D When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of maintenance.
The units should be placed so that they can be checked and replaced
easily when maintenance is performed.
D The installation conditions of the connector panel I/O module must be
satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the connector panel I/O
module must be installed in the direction shown in the following
figure. Clearances of 100 mm or more both above and below the I/O
unit are required for wiring and ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the
connector panel I/O module.

16
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

Top
Connector panel I/O module
(No screws or protrusions shall
extend from the bottom of this
unit.)

Bottom

D A control unit must be carefully isolated against vibration.

The CNC control unit itself may resonate at certain frequencies.
Perform a thorough check after mounting the CNC control unit on the
machine.
D To ensure conformity to the EMC command, refer to “Conforming to
the EMC Command (A–72937).”

17
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

3.4 The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
THERMAL DESIGN radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
OF THE CABINET cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.

3.4.1 The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C
Temperature Rise per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a
cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
within the Cabinet cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the
difference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air
to 10°C or less when the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W] x
6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]×10[°C] of rise in temperature
(6 W/°C is applied when the cabinet is large to some extent, in which case
an uneven temperature distribution is left in the cabinet even after the air
in it is circulated by the fan. When a small cabinet such as an operation
panel is used, 8 W/°C described in Subsection 3.4.4 can be used safely.)
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C under these
conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240 W. If the actual internal
heat is 320W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 13°C or
more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be
improved using the heat exchanger described next.

3.4.2 If the temperature rise cannot be limited to the permissible temperature

or lower by the cooling capacity of the cabinet, a heat exchanger must be
Cooling by Heat
added. The heat exchanger forcibly applies the air from both the inside
Exchanger and outside of the cabinet to the cooling fin to obtain effective cooling.
The heat exchanger enlarges the surface area.
A heat exchanger is to be prepared by the customer.

18
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

3.4.3
Heat Output of Each Table 3.4.3 (a) Heat output (Control units)

Unit Unit Heat output Remarks

Stand–alone type 1–slot rack 35W (*1), (*2)

control unit (including
main CPU board)
Stand–alone type 3–slot rack 35W (*1), (*2)
control unit (including
main CPU board)
Option board HSSB board 4W
Sub–CPU board 14W
FL–net board 6W
DeviceNet board 5W
M–NET board 6W
Ethernet board 6W
PLC interface board 30W (*3)
10.4″ LCD unit 30W (*4)
(with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)

NOTE
1 The heat output values of the boards in the option slots and
mini slots are not included.
2 The heat outputs of units connected to the CNC and
memory cards are not included.
3 The heat output of the PLC mounted on the PLC interface
board is included.
4 The heat output of the operator’s panel I/O function is also
included. (The indicated output value corresponds to when
50% of the input signals are turned on.)

Table 3.4.3 (b) Heat output (peripheral units common to LCD–mounted

type and separation type)
Unit Heat output (W) Remarks

MDI unit 0W
Operator’s panel I/O module 12W (*1)
Connector panel I/O module (basic) 8W (*1)
Connector panel I/O module 5W (*1)
(additional)

NOTE
The indicated values are when 50% of the module input
signals are ON.

19
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

3.4.4 With a small cabinet like the operator’s panel, the heat dissipating
Thermal Design of capacity of the cabinet is as shown below, assuming that there is sufficient
mixing of the air inside the cabinet.
Operator’s Panel Coated metal surfaces: 8 W/m2°C
Plastic surfaces: 3.7 W/m2°C
An example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.4 is
shown below.

Air guide
chamber
Machine operator’s panel

120–mm square fan

motor (for air mixing)

Fig. 3.4.4

Assume the following.

Thermal exchange rates : Coated metal surfaces 8 W/m2°C
: Plastic surfaces 3.7 W/m2°C
: Allowable temperature rise:
13°C higher than the exteriortemperature
Also, assume the following.
Dimensions of pendant type cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.4:
560(W) × 470(H) × 150(D) mm
Surface area of metallic sections : 0.5722 m2
Surface area of plastic sections : 0.2632 m2
In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is:
8 × 0.5722 × 13 + 3.7 × 0.2632 × 13 = 72 W.

20
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

3.5 The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
ACTION AGAINST designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
NOISE measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.

3.5.1 The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
Separating Signal following table:
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A
Secondary AC power line separately (Note 1) from groups B
and C, or cover group A with an
AC/DC power lines (containing the electromagnetic shield (Note 2).
A power lines for the servo and
spindle motors) See Section 3.5.4 and connect
spark killers or diodes with the
AC/DC solenoid solenoid and relay.
AC/DC relay
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid
and relay.
DC relay (24VDC)
Bind the cables in group B
DI/DO cable between the CNC and separately from group A, or cover
power magnetics cabinet group B with an electromagnetic
B shield.
DI/DO cable between the CNC and
Separate group B as far from
machine
Group C as possible.
24VDC input power cable of the It is more desirable to cover group
control unit and peripheral devices. B with the shield.

Cable between the CNC and I/O Bind the cables in group C
Unit separately from group A, or cover
Cable for position and velocity group C with an electromagnetic
feedback shield.

Cable between the CNC and Separate group C as far from

spindle amplifier Group B as possible.

Cable for the position coder Be sure to perform shield

processing in Section 3.5.5.
Cable for the manual pulse
C
generator
Cable between the CNC and the
MDI (Note 3)
RS–232C and RS–422 interface
cable
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with
the shield

21
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
3 The shield is not required when the cable between the CNC
and MDI is shorter than 30 cm.

Cabinet

Spindle Servo Control

amp. amp. unit
Cable of
group B, C

Duct
To
operator’s
panel,
motor, etc.
Cable of group A Section

Group A
Group B, C

Cover

22
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

3.5.2 The CNC machine tool uses the following three types of grounding:
Ground D Signal grounding
Signal grounding supplies a reference potential (0 V) for electrical
signals.
D Grounding for protection
Grounding for protection is performed for safety reasons as well as to
shield against external and internal noise. This type of grounding
includes, for example, the equipment frames, cases and panels of
units, and the shielding on interface cables connecting the equipment.
D Protective grounding (PE)
Protective grounding (PE) is performed to connect protection grounds
provided for equipment or between units to ground together at one
point as a grounding system.

Pendant box
Distributed α amplifier CNC
I/O

Display

Frame
AC power
supply

24–V power Operator’s

supply panel

AC input Frame

PE (ground plate of cabinet) Cabinet on machine side

Path for grounding

Path for protective grounding (PE)

Notes on grounding D The ground resistance in protective grounding (PE) must be 100 Ω or
less (type D grounding).
D The cable used for protective grounding (PE) must be of a sufficient
cross section to allow current to flow safely into protective ground
(PE) if an accident such as a short–circuit occurs. (Generally, a cross
section equal to or greater than that of the AC power cable is required.)
D The cable connected to protective ground (PE) must be incorporated
into the AC power wire such that power cannot be supplied with the
ground wire disconnected.

23
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

3.5.3
Connecting the Ground
Terminal of the Control
Unit
Single–slot rack Three–slot rack

Signal ground terminal

M4
Signal ground terminal (threaded hole)
(Faston terminal)

M3 (threaded hole)

Ground cable
2 mm2 or more
Grounding plate
of the cabinet

Protection ground (PE)

Connect the 0–V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.

CAUTION
Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification:
A02B–0166–K330), and use a twisted wire of 2 mm2 or
more not longer than 300 mm. Otherwise, the control unit
becomes very susceptible to noise.

24
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

3.5.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.

Notes on selecting the D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
spark killer type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2
2) Capacitance (C) : to (µF)
10 20

I : Current at stationary state of the coil

R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer

AC Spark killer
relay

Motor

Spark killer

Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.

Note) Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminators

clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp
rising edge.

Diode (used for direct–current circuits)

– +
Diode
Use a diode which can withstand a
DC relay voltage up to two times the applied
voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.

25
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

3.5.5 If a cable connected to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, or

Cable Clamp and other device requires shielding, clamp the cable as shown below. The
clamp both supports and shields the cable. Use this clamp to ensure stable
Shield Processing operation of the system.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :

Ground plate

Cable

Metal fittings
for clamp
40 to 80 mm

Fig. 3.5.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)

26
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

ÇÇ
Machine side
installation

ÇÇ board

ÇÇ
Control unit

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Metal fittings
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
for clamp
Shield cover

Fig. 3.5.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.

Ground terminal
(grounded)

Hole for securing metal fitting clamp

Mount screw hole

Fig. 3.5.5 (c) Ground plate

For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.

27
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

Ground
8mm
plate

12mm

20mm

Fig. 3.5.5 (d) Ground plate holes

(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

Max. 55mm

28mm

6mm

17mm

Fig. 3.5.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B–0124–K001 (8 pieces)

28
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

3.6
CONTROL UNIT

3.6.1 The control unit is equipped with a fan motor.

Installing the Control Air is fed into the bottom of the unit and output from the fan motor
Unit mounted on the top of the unit.
The spaces shown in Fig. 3.6.1 (areas (A) and (B)) are always required to
ensure smooth air flow.
Also, adequate service access space is required in front of and at the top
of the unit so that printed circuit boards and the fan motor can be replaced
easily if necessary.
There is a spare connector located at the far end (at middle height) on the
right side of the control unit. This connector is used for controller testing
and other purposes. Therefore, space (area (C)) for handling the
connector is required.

29
3. INSTALLATION B–63393EN/02

Space for air flow, and access area for fan replacement

Single–slot rack: Approx. 65

Three–slot rack: Approx. 180

ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
Approx. 180

ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
A
50

30
A

ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ Access space

ÔÔ
ÊÊ
for spare
connector

ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
C Spare connector
380

ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÔÔ
ÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
50

B B
80

Unit: mm
Sufficient space for
replacing a printed circuit
board is required.

Fig. 3.6.1

30
B–63393EN/02 3. INSTALLATION

3.7 For the cabling diagram, see the control unit configuration and
component names in Section 1.1.
CABLING DIAGRAM

31
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02

4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

32
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.1 This chapter explains the connection of power supply for Series 18i–LNA
control unit.
GENERAL

33
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02

4.2
TURNING ON AND
OFF THE POWER TO
THE CONTROL UNIT

4.2.1 Supply power (24 VDC) to the control uint from a stabilized external
Power Supply for the sources (24 VDC).
Control Unit

PSM SVM
Power supply Servo amplifier
Main circuit Magnetic AC line module module CNC control unit
breaker contractor filter
3–phase
200 V AC 200 VAC for
power line

Single–phase
200 VAC for
control line 24 VDC 24 VDC
input output

External 24 VDC 10.4″ LCD

stabilized
power unit, etc.
I/O units, etc.

Fig. 4.2.1

4.2.2 Specifications of a recommended external 24–VDC power supply

Specifications and (regulated power supply) (The requirements of the UL 1950 standard
must be satisfied.)
Circuit Configuration
Output voltage: Output voltage: 24 VDC 10% (21.6 to 26.4 V)
of External 24–VDC (Including ripple voltage and noise. See the
Power Supply figure given below.)
Output current: Continuous load current must be the current
consumption level of the CNC and units or
higher.
(At the maximum temperature within the
power magnetics cabinet in which the power
supply is placed)
Load fluctuation (including surge current):
The above output voltage range must not be
exceeded by any load fluctuations due to
external DO and so forth.
Instantaneous AC input disconnection hold time:
10 ms (for –100%)
20 ms (for –50%)

34
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

(1) Timing chart Instantaneous Instantaneous

disconnection (–100%) disconnection (–50%)

AC input 10ms 20ms

voltage

26.4V
Output voltage
21.6V
Abrupt
change
in load
Output current

0A

Fig. Example of ripple voltage and noise in a

switching power supply
26.4V
Noise

Must be with-
in this range Ripple voltage

Noise

21.6V

Fig. 4.2.2 Timing chart

D Circuit configuration The circuit configurations shown in <1> and <2> below are prohibited.
Prohibition <1> Circuit example in which the specified output voltage level cannot
be maintained at instantaneous disconnection (the output voltage
drops to below 21.6 V.)

Rectifier
AC input CNC
circuit

Rectifier
AC input CNC
circuit

Rectifier circuits perform full–wave rectification by using diodes.

35
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02

<2> Circuit example in which an abrupt change in load causes the output
voltage to exceed the output voltage specification (21.6 to 26.4 V)

Regulated
AC input CNC
power supply

Device with
large load
fluctuation

Regulated
AC input power supply CNC

Device with
large surge
current

In case of <2>, prepare another regulated power supply specially for

the device with abrupt change in load to prevent the change from
influencing the CNC and other units.
Recommendation The description of a unit having a 24–VDC power supply, indicating
that the unit must be turned on at the same time as the CNC or before
the CNC power–on operation, has been modified as follows: Turn on
the unit at the same time as the CNC. When the unit is turned on at
the same time as the CNC, it is recommended that connections be
made on the same line as shown in Fig. 4.2.2 (b).
Turning on the power at the same time:
If the following power–on timing is satisfied, the CNC and units are
regarded as being turned on at the same time:

ON
CNC power supply
ON
t1 t2

Power supply of ON
units (including the
Power Mate) ON

t1: 200 ms The units (including the Power Mate) are turned on within
200 ms before the power to the CNC is turned on.
t2: –500 ms The units (including the Power Mate) are turned on within
500 ms after the power to the CNC is turned on.

36
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

The description of a unit having a 24–VDC power supply, indicating that

the unit must be turned off at the same time as the CNC or after the CNC
power–on, remains unchanged. (When power is turned off at the same
time, the power to the unit may be disconnected within 500 ms before the
power to the CNC is turned off.)

4.2.3 Turn on the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following
sequence:
Power–on Sequence
1 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)
2 Amplifier control power supply (200 VAC)
3 Power to slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link, power
to the CNC (24 VDC)

“Turning on the power to all the units at the same time” means completing
the power–on operations in 1 and 2 above within 500 ms of performing
power–on of CNC control unit in 3.
The power–on sequence of a detachable LCD/MDI supporting the display
link is undefined in the power–on sequence of the CNC control unit.

37
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02

4.2.4 Turn off the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following
Power–off Sequence sequence:

1 Power to slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link, power
to the CNC (24 VDC)
2 Amplifier control power supply (200 VAC)
3 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)

“Turning off the power to all units at the same time” means completing
the power–off operations of CNC control unit in 2 and 3 above within 500
ms before the power–off operation described in 1 above. If the power to
the units indicated in 2 or 3 is turned off other than within 500 ms of the
power in 1 being turned off, alarm information is left in the NC.
The power–on sequence of a detachable LCD/MDI supporting the display
link is undefined in the power–on sequence of the CNC control unit.
When the power is turned off or when the power is momentarily
disconnected, motor control is disabled. Problems that may be generated
from the motor control disabled state should be handled from the
machine, as necessary.
For example, when movement along a vertical axis is controlled, a brake
should be applied to prevent falling. Usually, the brake clamps the motor
when the servo is not activated or when the motor is not turning. The
clamp is released only when the motor is turning. When servo axis control
is disabled by power–off or momentary power disconnection, the brake
usually clamps the servo motor. In this case, before the relay for clamping
operates, the controlled axis may fall. So, also consider whether the
distance the axis is likely to fall will cause a problem.

38
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.3 Supply power to the control unit from stabilized external resource
(24 VDC).
CABLE FOR POWER
SUPPLY TO Control unit External power
CONTROL UNIT
CP1
1 +24V 24VDC stabilized
2 0V power
3 24VDC "10%

Cable

AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact) External power

Select a source that

+24V (1)
meets the external
0V (2)
power terminal.

Recommended cable : A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)

(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)

The 24 VDC input to CP1 can be output from CP2 for use in branching.
The connection of CP2 is as shown below. In this case, the external 24
VDC power supply should have a rating which is equal to the sum of the
current consumed by the control unit and the current used via CP2.

Control unit External device

CP2
1 +24V
2 0V
3

Cable

CP2
AMP JAPAN
2–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact) External device
+24V (1) Select a connector that
matches the pin layout of
0V (2) the external device.

39
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02

4.4 In a system using the Series 18i–LNA, batteries are used as follows:
BATTERIES Component connected to
Use
battery

Memory backup in the CNC CNC

Preservation of the current position indicated Servo amplifier

by the absolute pulse coder built into the motor

4.4.1 Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAM
Battery for Memory memory in the control unit. The power to the SRAM memory is backed
up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The
Backup (3VDC) above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup
battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can
maintain the contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message “BAT”
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.
When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm (SRAM parity alarm or SRAM ECC alarm) to occur
because the contents of memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and
reenter data after replacing the battery.

CAUTION
1 Be sure to back up the latest data of the SRAM memory to
a memory card or Handy File to protect against a dead
battery or accident.
2 When the 18i–LNA with a setting/display unit not connected
at all times is used, display a battery alarm on the machine
operator’s panel by using the battery alarm signal BTAL.
3 The battery is secured onto the main CPU board. When
attaching/ detaching the main CPU board with the battery
connected, back up the latest data beforehand to protect
against loss of data.
4 If the power to the 18i–LNA is turned off with the battery
removed, data backup for more than 30 minutes is
impossible. If the battery is removed when the power to the
18i–LNA is off, data cannot be backed up.

Replacing the battery (1) Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering drawing number:
A02B–0200–K102).
(2) Turn the control unit on for about 30 seconds.
(3) Turn the control unit off.
(4) Remove the old battery from the front panel of the control unit. First
unplug the battery connector then take the battery out of its case.
(5) Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.

40
B–63393EN/02 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

CAUTION
1 Before replacing the battery, check that the latest data of the
SRAM memory is already backed up.
2 Turn off the power to the machine before replacing the
battery. Only personnel trained in maintenance and safety
can replace the battery when the power to the machine is
on.
3 Complete steps (3) to (5) above within 30 minutes. If the
battery is detached for a long time, the contents of the
SRAM memory are lost.

Claw holding the battery

Battery connector

Lithium battery

WARNING
Incorrect battery replacement may cause an explosion. Do
not use a battery other than that specified (specification:
A02B–0200–K102).

Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate local

ordinances or rules. When discarding batteries, insulate them by using
tape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from short–circuiting.

41
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63393EN/02

4.4.2 The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installed
Battery for Absolute in the servo amplifier. For how to connect and replace the battery, refer
to the following manuals:
Pulse Coder Built into
D FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series Maintenance Manual
the Motor (6 VDC)
NOTE
1 Clearly specify the method of reference position return
operation beforehand to protect against a dead battery or
accident. Before replacing the battery, in particular, check
that the method of reference position return operation is
clearly specified.
2 When the 18i–LNA with a display/setting unit not connected
at all times is used, monitor error code signals (ER11 to
ER68), and display a battery alarm on the machine
operator’s panel and so forth if an alarm indicating a battery
voltage drop in the absolute pulse coder is detected.

42
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

43
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

5.1
CONNECTION WITH
THE LCD UNIT

5.1.1 With the Series 18i–LNA, the following LCD units can be connected:
Overview
Connection with an LCD unit (with the touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)

10.4″ LCD unit

Control 24VDC, Optional cable (with touch panel
unit and operator’s
panel I/O)

NOTE
A display control card supporting the LCD unit is required in
the control unit.

Connection with a detachable LCD/MDI

Control Branch
connector Detachable LCD/
unit
MDI

100/200VAC

NOTE
A display control card supporting the display link is required
in the control unit.

44
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.1.2
Connection with the
10.4″ LCD Unit (with
the Touch Panel and
Operator’s Panel I/O)

10.4″ LCD Unit

Control unit (with a touch pan-
el and operator’s
Optical cable panel I/O)
COP20A
COP20B

24VDC power supply

CP2 CP1A

Manual pulse
JA60
generator

Operator’s
CE56
panel

45
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

D Connection between the Optical cable and power supply cable are used to make the connection
CNC control unit and between the CNC control unit and 10.4″ LCD unit (with the touch panel
LCD unit and operator’s panel I/O) (referred to as the 10.4” LCD unit). For details
of the optical cable, see Appendix D.

D Connection with the See Subsection 8.6.9.

manual pulse generator

D Connection with the See Section 8.6.

operator’s panel

D Connector layout Shown below is the rear of the 10.4″ LCD unit (with the cover removed):

Inverter printed circuit board

LCD control or operator’s panel

I/O printed circuit board

I/O signal connection LCD signal

CE56 COP20B

24 V input
CP1A

M4 stud for protective

For 24–V grounding (PE)
I/O Link (upper) MDI signal branch–out
JD1B input This must be connected to
CP1B ground.
CA55
I/O Link (lower) Connection to manual pulse generator
JD1A JA60

46
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

D Connection of a power Feed power to the 10.4″ LCD unit from a CNC control unit.
supply to the 10.4″ LCD
unit
10.4″ LCD unit CNC control unit

CP1A CP2
1 +24V 1 +24V
2 0V 2 0V
3 3

Cable

CP1A CP2
AMP Japan AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (housing) 1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact) 1–175218–5 (contact)
+24V (1) +24V (1)
0V (2) 0V (2)

For distribution, 24 VDC applied to CP1A can be output on CP1B. CP1B

is connected as shown below. In this case, the sum of the current drawn
by the LCD unit and that drawn through CP1B needs to be supplied to
CP1A from the external 24 VDC power supply.

LCD unit External device

CP1B
1 +24V
2 0V
3

Cable

CP1B
AMP Japan
2–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
External power supply
+24V (1) Select a cable that
0V (2) matches the pins of the
external power supply.

NOTE
If the power to the LCD unit is turned off during CNC system
operation, a disconnection alarm is issued, stopping the
CNC.

47
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

5.1.3 The detachable LCD/MDI consists of an 8.4–inch LCD/MDI unit housed

Connection with the in a portable case.
Detachable LCD/MDI

D Specifications
Display 8.4″ TFT, 40 characters 16 lines

Dimensions 445 (W) 229 (H) 122 (D) (excluding connection cables)

Weight 3.5 kg (excluding connection cables)

Power supply 100 to 240 VAC

Rating 0.5A (at 100 VAC)

0.25A (at 200 VAC)

Interface One channel of display link or video signal/MDI signal.

Switch–selectable

Keyboard Small–machining type alphabetical keys

Drawing No. A02B–0166–C291#R (excluding connection cables)

NOTE
1 The indicated dimensions do not include the protrusions on
the top and side.
2 This unit is not provided with cables.

D Notes on use
environment
CAUTION
1 The operating ambient temperature is 0°C to 45°C. For
other environment conditions, see Subsection 3.1.1.
2 The detachable LCD/MDI unit and cable joint portions are
not waterproof.
Ensure that these portions are not exposed directly to any
contaminants.
3 Use the unit in a location that is not subject to noise or
magnetic fields.
4 An aluminum body is used to make the unit lighter. Note that
a strong impact to the case may result in deformation.

48
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

D Connection to the Series The detachable LCD/MDI is connected to the 18i–LNA as shown in the
18i – LNA diagram below. When the 10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch panel and
operator’s panel I/O function) described in the previous section is
connected, the detachable LCD/MDI unit cannot be used.
D Before connection to the Power Mate i–LNA, connect cables J167 and
J169 to the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
D In the cabinet, connect cable J166 to the CNC, and connect J168 to the
power supply. On the relay panel, install connectors CA66 and CPA.

Selection switch
SW1
Cabinet
Detachable
18i–LNA LCD/MDI
Relay panel
CA66
J176 J167
JD45 CA61
Display link
CA62

CPA
J168 J169
100/200 VAC CA63

J171
M51

Connection method
(1) Set selection switch SW1 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit to B.
Selection switch SW1 is labeled as follows:

(2) Attach the connector of signal cable J167 to connector CA66 on the
relay panel.
(3) Attach the connector of power supply cable J169 to connector CPA on
the relay panel.
Removal method
(1) Unplug the connector of power supply cable J169 from connector CPA
on the relay panel.
(2) Unplug the connector of serial signal cable J167 from connector CA66
on the relay panel.

49
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

NOTE
1 It is recommended that the label specified by FANUC be
attached to near connector CA66 on the relay panel to
indicate that selection switch SW1 is to be set to B.
(Described below.)
2 Cable J171 is not connected to the relay panel. Unplug the
cable from connector CA62 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit
in advance, or ensure that connector M51 is not exposed
directly to any contaminant. (In an environment subject to
strong noise, cable J171 may function as an antenna and
pick up that noise).
3 Provide a cover for the relay panel so as not to directly
expose connectors CA66 and CPA to any contaminants
when no cable is connected to these connectors.
4 After cable connection, the operation of selection switch
SW1 is permitted.
5 When performing special operation at CNC power–up such
as a memory all clear operation with the detachable
LCD/MDI unit, connect the detachable LCD/MDI unit to the
CNC, and then turn on the CNC.

50
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Details of cable J176

CNC JD45 CA66 on relay panel

(PCR-EV20MDT) (MR–20RM)

1 RXD 11 0V 1 (VDR) 8 (0V) 14 RXD

2 *RXD 12 0V 2 (HSYNC) 9 (0V) 15 *RXD
J176
3 TXD 13 RXTM1 3 (VSYNC) 10 (0V) 16 TXD
4 *TXD 14 RXTM2 4 (VDG) 11 (0V) 17 *TXD
5 15 TXTM1 5 (VDG) 12 (0V) 18 0V
6 16 TXTM2 6 13 19 0V
7 17 7 20
8 18
9 19
10 20 Leave unused pins and pins enclosed in parentheses () open.

JD45 CA66

01 14
RXD RXD
02 15
*RXD *RXD #28AWG
Twisted pairs
03 16
TXD TXD
04 17
*TXD *TXD
11 18 0V
0V
12 19 #28AWG
0V 0V
13
RXTM1 Shield
14
RXTM2
15
TXTM1
16
TXTM2

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 pairs, common shield) <Hitachi Cable, Ltd., Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for JD45:
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA, Housing:
PCR–V20LA <Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for CA66:
MR–20RM (with no housing) <Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.>
Maximum cable length: Cables J176 and J167 must not exceed 50 m in total.

NOTE
1 The connector of this cable is secured on the relay panel of
the cabinet. On the relay panel, be careful not to expose the
connector pins and joint portions directly to any contaminant
regardless of whether the cables of the detachable
LCD/MDI unit are attached.
2 Do not change signal lines between twisted pairs.
3 Be sure to connect RXTM1 (13) and RXTM2 (14), and
TXTM1 (15) and TXTM2 (16) of JD45, respectively.
4 This cable cannot be directly attached and detached using
the CNC connector JD45 as the attachment of cable J167.

51
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

Details of cable J167

CA66 on relay panel Detachable LCD/MDI unit

(MR–20RM) CA61 (DBM–25S–0001)

1 VDR 8 0V 14 RXD 1 FG 14
2 HSYNC 9 0V 15 *RXD 2 VDR 15 0V
J167
3 VSYNC 10 0V 16 TXD 3 VDG 16 0V
4 VDG 11 0V 17 *TXD 4 VDB 17 0V
5 VDB 12 0V 18 0V 5 VSYNC 18 0V
6 13 19 0V 6 HSYNC 19 0V
7 20 7 20 0V
8 TXD 21 0V
9 *TXD 22 RXD
10 23 *RXD
11 24
Leave unused pins open. 12 25
13

CA66 CA61

14 22
RXD RXD
15 23
*RXD *RXD
19 21
0V 0V #25AWG
16 8 Shielded
TXD TXD twisted pair
17 9
*TXD *TXD
18 20
0V 0V

1 2
VDR VDR
0V 8 15 0V
4 3
VDG VDG
0V 11 16
0V
5 4
VDB VDB 75W
12 17 coaxial cable
0V 0V
2 6
HSYNC HSYNC
9 19
0V 0V
3 5
VSYNC VSYNC
10 18
0V 0V
Shield 1
FG #28AWG

Recommended cable:
A66L–001–0450(#25AWG shielded twisted pair 2, 75W coaxial cable 5, common shield)
Standard outside diameter 11.4 mm (12 mm max.) <Hitachi Cable, Ltd.>
Recommended connector for CA66:
MR–20LF (with housing) <Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for CA61:
D–SUB 25–pin (DBM–25P) <Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.>
A housing that matches the outside diameter of the cable being used is required.
The DB–C4–J11–S2 is recommended. <Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.>
Maximum cable length: Cables J166 and J167 must not exceed 50 m in total.

52
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

NOTE
1 The connector of this cable is connected to the relay panel of the cabinet. Ensure that the joint
portion between the connector and relay panel is not exposed directly to any contaminants.
2 Connector CA61 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit is not waterproof. Ensure that the connector
is not exposed directly to any contaminants.
3 Do not change signal lines between twisted pairs, and do not change coaxial cable signals and
0–V lines between pairs, either.

Details of cable J168 1) For 100 VAC

100 VAC
J168 Relay terminal for 100 VAC
0.5 A
CPA
50/60 Hz, single
Contact grounding type with
phase
double poles
15A, 125V

R R
100A 100A
S S
100B 100B
G G G
G G

2) For 200 VAC

200 VAC power

supply 0.25 A J168 Relay terminal for 200 VAC
50/60 Hz, CPA
single phase Contact grounding type with
double poles
15A, 250V

R R
200A 200A
S S
200B 200B
G G G
G G

NOTE
1 The connector of this cable is connected to the relay panel of the cabinet. Ensure that the joint
portion between the connector and relay panel is not exposed directly to any contaminant.
2 The relay connector of this cable is not necessarily located on the same relay panel as CA66.
3 Use class D or higher grounding.

53
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

Details of cable J169 1) For 100 VAC

CPA on relay panel Detachable LCD/MDI unit

(Contact grounding type with CA63
double poles, 15 A, 125 V) (JL04V–2E10SL–3PE–B)

R 100A J169 R 100A

S 100B S 100B
G
G G G
G G

R
100A 100A
S
100B 100B
G
G G

2) For 200 VAC

CPA on relay panel Detachable LCD/MDI unit

(Contact grounding type, CA63
(JL04V–2E10SL–3PE–B)
double–pole, 15 A, 250 V)

R 200A R 200A
J169 S
S 200B S 200B
G G
G G
G G

R R
200A 200A
S S
200B 200B
G G
G G

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0411 #3X0.5 (#25AWG 3)
Recommended connector for CPA:
Attachment plug grounding type, double–pole, 15 A, 125 V
<WF7004, manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.> (for 100 VAC)
Attachment plug grounding type, double–pole, 15 A, 250 V
<WF7013, manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.> (for 200 VAC)
Recommended connector for CA63:
JL04V–6A10SL–3SE–EB, straight plug <Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.>
JL04V–1012CK(06), cable clamp <Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.>

NOTE
1 The connector of this cable is connected to the relay panel of the cabinet. Ensure that the joint
portion between the connector and relay panel is not exposed directly to any contaminant.
2 Connector CA63 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit is not waterproof. Ensure that the connector
is not exposed directly to any contaminant.

54
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Details of cable J171

M51 on relay panel CA62 on detachable LCD/MDI unit

(MR–20RF)
04 03 02 01
1 8 *CM2 14
2 *CM0 9 *CM3 15 *CM5 *CM3 *CM2 *CM1 *CM0
3 *CM1 10 *SW7 16 *CM6
4 *SW6 11 *SW5 17 *CM7 10 09 08 07 06 05
5 *SW4 12 *SW3 18 *CM4
*SW2 *SW1 *SW0 FG
6 *SW2 13 *SW1 19 *CM8
7 *SW0 20
16 15 14 13 12 11

*CM6 *CM5 *SW5 *SW4 *SW3 *CM4

20 19 18 17

Leave unused pins open. *CM8 *CM7 *SW7 *SW6

M51 CA62

7 6 *SW0
*SW0
6 8 *SW2
*SW2
5 13 *SW4
*SW4
4 17 *SW6
*SW6
2 1 *CM0
*CM0
8 3 *CM2
*CM2
18 11 *CM4
*CM4
16 16 *CM6
*CM6
19 20 *CM8
*CM8
13 7 *SW1
*SW1
12 12 *SW3
*SW3
11 14 *SW5
*SW5
10 18 *SW7
*SW7
3 2 *CM1
*CM1
9 4 *CM3
*CM3
15 15 *CM5
*CM5
17 19 *CM7
*CM7
5
FG

Shield

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28 AWG 10 pairs, common shield) <Hitachi Cable, Ltd., Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for M51:
MR–20LF (with housing) <Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.>
Recommended connector for CA62:
HR22–12TPD–20S (housing and contact) <Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.>
Drawing number to be specified when this connector is purchased from FANUC A02B–0211–K382

55
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

NOTE
1 The connector of this cable is connected to the relay panel
of the cabinet. Ensure that the joint portion between the
connector and relay panel is not exposed directly to any
contaminant.
2 Connector CA62 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit is not
waterproof. Ensure that the connector is not exposed
directly to any contaminant.
3 In a system using the LCD unit described in the previous
section, this cable is required only when the MDI part is
being used for maintenance.

D Supplementary 1) A lower ambient temperature reduces the LCD brightness. (In

particular, immediately after the power is turned on, the LCD screen
will be dark.) This is a characteristic of the LCD; it does not indicate
a failure of the LCD. As the ambient temperature increases, the LCD
screen becomes brighter.
2) The cables of the detachable LCD/MDI unit are consumables.
D Cable list The following cables are available from FANUC:
Cable Supplementary
Cable No. Drawing No.
length description

J167 A02B–0166–K901 1.5 m

Serial/video signal cable of
A02B–0166–K902 5m detachable LCD/MDI

J169 A02B–0166–K905 1.5 m Detachable LCD/MDI

power supply cable for
A02B–0166–K906 5m connection to 200 VAC

J171 A02B–0166–K903 1.5 m

MDI signal cable of
A02B–0166–K904 5m detachable LCD/MDI

1) A02B–0166–K905, K906
Connector CPA is a 3–pin connector for 200 VAC. By attaching
attachment A or B, listed below, to this cable, this cable can be attached
to a 3–pin connector for 100 VAC.
Attachment Drawing No. Length Supplementary description

Attachment A A02B–0166–K910 0.1 m

Attachment B A02B–0166–K911 1m For 100–VAC connection

56
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Detachable Cable J169 Attachment A Attachment B

LCD/MDI unit

200 VAC AMP Japan, 100 VAC

Attachment plug 3 pins Attachment plug
grounding type (200 VAC) grounding type
Double poles, Double poles,
15A, 250 V 5A, 150 V

NOTE
The connector of the attachment is not waterproof. Ensure
that the connector is not directly exposed to any
contaminant. (Be careful not to allow attachment A or either
end to touch the floor.)

D Label When a relay panel is installed to connect the 18i–LNA and this
detachable LCD/MDI, it is recommended that the following label be
affixed to the detachable LCD/MDI. This label indicates that switch SW1
on the detachable LCD/MDI is to be set to B.

A02B–0166–K031
(Label shown to the left 50)

57
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

5.2
CONNECTION WITH
INPUT/OUTPUT
DEVICES

5.2.1 An input/output device is used to enter information such as CNC

Overview programs and parameters from an external device to the CNC, or to output
information from the CNC to an external device.
The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms to
RS–232–C, so that a connection can be made with a device that has an
RS–232–C interface.

5.2.2
RS–232–C Serial Port
CNC

RELAY CONNECTOR
(DBM–25S)
JD5A, JD5B 1 FG
PCR–V20MD 14
2 SD
1 RD 11 SD 15
3 RD
16
2 0V 12 0V i i h 4 RS
3 DR 13 ER 17
5 CS
4 0V 14 0V 18
6 DR
5 CS 15 RS 19
7 SG
6 0V 16 0V 20 ER
8 CD
7 CD 17 21
9
8 0V 18 22
10
9 19 +24V 23
11
10 +24V 20 24
12
25 +24V
13

NOTE
1 +24 V can be used as the power supply for FANUC
RS–232–C equipment.
2 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.

58
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

CABLE CONNECTION

1 3 RD
RD
2
0V 3 6 DR
DR 4
0V 5
6 5 CS
CS
0V 7
8 8 CD
CD
9
0V
10
11
+24V 12 2 SD
SD 13
0V 14
15 20 ER
ER
0V 16
17 4 RS
RS
18 7 SG
0V 19
20
25 +24V
+24V
1
FG
SHIELD

RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTORS (JD5A, JD5B)
PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION (PUNCH PANEL) for
JD5A and JD5B
<Narrow width type>
A02B–0120–C191 (1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (2 m)
A02B–0120–C193 (5 m)

NOTE
Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.

59
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

5.2.3
RS–232–C Interface
Specification
RS–232–C Interface Generally signals as follows are used in RS–232–C interface.
signals

CNC

Output
SD (Send data)

Input
RD (Recieve data)

RS (Request to Send) When CS is not used

short CS and RS.
CS (Enable to send)
When DR is not
used short DR
ER (Ready)
and ER.

DR (Data set ready)

Always short
CD (Check data) ER and CD.

SG (Signal ground)

FG (Frame ground)

Fig. 5.2.3 (a) RS–232–C interface

60
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Signal description of RS–232C

Signal
RS–232–C interface name
circuit I/O Description
number

SD 103 Output Sending

Start bit Stop bit
data

RD 104 Input Receiving ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF
(When ISO code “0” is sent)
data

RS 105 Input Sending This signal is set to on when NC starts

request sending data and is turned off when
transmission ends.

CS 106 Input Sending When both this signal and the DR

permitted signal are set, the NC can send data. If
external device processing is delayed
by a punching operation, etc., NC data
sending can be stopped by turning off
this signal after sending two
characters, including the data being
sent currently. If this signal will not be
used, make sure to strap this signal
circuit to the RS signal circuit.

DR 107 Input Data set When external device is ready to

ready operate, this signal is set. This signal
should usually be connected to the
signal indicating external device power
supply being on. (ER signal of external
device). See Note below.
The NC transfers data when this signal
is set. If the signals turned off during
data transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the
DR signal will not be used, make sure
to strap this signal circuit to the ER
signal circuit.

ER 108.2 Output NC ready This signal is set when the NC is ready

to to operate. External device should
operation regard the SD signal as being
significant when the ER signal is set.

CD 109 Input Signal Since this signal is not used in

quality connections with external device, the
signal signal circuit must be strapped, inside
the connecting cable, to the ER signal
circuit.

SG 102 Signal
grounding

FG 101 Frame
grounding

NOTE
Signal on/off state is defined as follows;
–3V or lower +3V or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing

61
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

Transmission Method of
RS–232–C interface

Start–stop Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial interface.
Series 18i–LNA use the start–stop method. With this method, start and
stop signals are output before and after each data bit.

One character in start–stop

b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8

Start Data bit Stop bits

bit (8 bit including one parity bit) (2 bits)

Codes Transmission codes are as follows:

(i) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.

(ii)ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code input is
necessary.)
The connected external device must be able to recognize the following
control codes, sent from NC.
Control code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

DC1 Tape reader start f f f

DC2 Tape punch designation f f f

DC3 Tape reader stop f f f f

DC4 Tape punch release f f f f

NOTE
The listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.

In this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.

(a) NC can control external device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4.
(b) When external processing falls behind the pace of the NC signals
(When NC issues data)
(i) External device can temporarily stop NC data output by using the
NC’s CS signal. Data output stops within two characters including
a currently transmitting character when CS OFF signal is input to
NC. When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission start.
(ii)If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten
characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts
sending data again.
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the
external device must satisfy the specification shown in Table 5.2.3 (a).

62
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Table 5.2.3
ISO code EIA code
Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 f f F 0 f F Numeral 0
1 f f f F f 1 F f Numeral 1
2 f f f F f 2 F f Numeral 2
3 f f F f f 3 f F f f Numeral 3
4 f f f F f 4 F f Numeral 4
5 f f F f f 5 f F f f Numeral 5
6 f f F f f 6 f F f f Numeral 6
7 f f f F f f f 7 F f f f Numeral 7
8 f f f f F 8 f F Numeral 8
9 f f f F f 9 f f F f Numeral 9
A f F f a f f F f Address A
B f F f b f f F f ? Address B
C f f F f f c f f f F f f Address C
D f F f d f f F f ? Address D
E f f F f f e f f f F f f ? Address E
F f f F f f f f f f F f f Address F
G f F f f f g f f F f f f Address G
H f f F h f f f F Address H
I f f f F f i f f f f F f Address I
J f f f F f j f f F f ? Address J
K f f F f f k f f F f Address K
L f f f F f l f F f f ? Address L
M f f F f f m f f F f Address M
N f f F f f n f F f f Address N
Not used at significant data zone in ISO
O f f f F f f f o f F f f code.
Assumed as address 0 at EIA code.
P f f F p f f F f f f Address P
Q f f f F f q f f f F Address Q
R f f f F f r f f F f Address R
S f f F f f s f f F f Address S
T f f f F f t f F f f Address T
U f f F f f u f f F f Address U
V f f F f f v f F f f ? Address V
W f f f F f f f w f F f f Address W
X f f f f F x f f F f f f Address X
Y f f f F f y f f f F ? Address Y
Z f f f F f z f f F f Address Z
DEL f f f f f F f f f Del f f f f F f f f : Delete (cancel erroneous hole)

NUL F Blank F : No holes. Not used at significant data

zone is EIA code.
BS f f F BS f f F f : Back space
HT f F f Tab f f f F f f : Tabulator
LF or NL f F f CR or EOB f F End of block
CR f f F f f : Carriage return
SP f f F SP f F : Space
% f f F f f ER f F f f Absolute rewind stop
( f f F ( 2–4–5 ) f f F f Control out (start of comment)
) f f f F f ( 2–4–7 ) f f F f Control in (end of comment)
+ f f F f f + f f f F : Plus sign
– f f F f f – f F Minus sign
: f f f F f Assumed as program number in ISO code.
/ f f f F f f f / f f F f Optional block skip
. f f F f f . f f f F f f Decimal point
# f f F f f : Sharp
$ f F f : Dollar symbol
& f f F f f & f F f f : Ampersand
’ f F f f f : Apostrophe
: f f f F f : Asterisk
, f f f F f , f f f F f f : Comma
; f f f f F f f : Semicolon
< f f f F f : Left angle bracket
= f f f f F f f : Equal mark
> f f f f F f f : Right angle bracket
? f f f F f f f : Question mark
@ f f F : Commerical at mark
” f F f : Quotation mark

63
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

NOTE
1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA
converter, the following items must be noted in Table 5.3.4
(a).
Control out (Comment field start)
Control in (Comment field end)

EIA code (.......................) CR o ....................

Condition1 Condition1 Condition2 Condition3

ISO code (.......................) LF : ....................

Condition1
Left parenthesis “(”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5
when used in the EIA code.
Right parenthesis “)”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7
when used in the EIA code.
Condition2
EIA code CR is LF in ISO code.
Condition3
EIA code O is : in ISO code.

2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output

from the NC. So they need not to be punched on the NC
tape.

(iii) Transmission rate (Baud rate)

The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits transferred per
second.
The following baud rates are available depending on the system
parameter.
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600.
(Example)
Baud rate : 110
When using one start bit and two stop bits (totalling 11 bits
per character):
110
Transmission characters/second= =10 characters/second
11
(Max.)
(iv) Cable length
The cable length depends on the connected device type. Consult with
the device manufacturers for actual connecting cable lengths.

64
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Time chart when the NC (1) NC outputs DC1.

receives data (2) The external device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
(Read into memory) (3) NC sends DC3 when NC processing is delayed.
(4) The external device stops sending data to NC after receiving DC3.
The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If it
sends more than 10 characters, alarm 087 will occur.
(5) NC reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
(6) The external device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code
(the data must be the next data to the preceding.)
(7) NC sends DC3 upon completing data read.
(8) The external device stops sending data.

10ms or longer 100ms or longer

ER(Output)

RS(Output)
DC1 CD3 DC1 DC3

SD(Output)
ER code

RD(Input)

DR(Input)

CS(Input)

Up to 10 characters
1ms or longer

65
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

Time chart when the NC (1) NC output DC2.

send data (Punch out) (2) NC outputs punch data in succession.
(3) When data processing is delayed at the external device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a currently
transmitting character when CS signal is turned off.
When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig.
5.2.3 (b))
(b) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten
characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts sending
data again. (See Fig. 5.2.3 (c))
(4) The NC starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on after
the external device completes data processing.
(5) The NC issues DC4 upon completing data output.

10ms or longer 100ms or longer

ER(Output)

RS(Output)
DC2 DC4

SD(Output)

RD(Input)

CS(Input)

1ms or longer Within 2 characters

Fig. 5.2.3 (b)

10ms or longer 100ms or longer

ER(Output)

RS(Output)
DC2 DC4

SD(Output)
DC3 DC1
RD(Input)

Within 10 characters

DR(Input)

CS(Input)

1ms or longer

Fig. 5.2.3 (c)

66
B–63393EN/02 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Connection between
RS–232–C interface and
external device
CNC I/O device side
SD SD

RD RD

RS RS

CS CS

ER ER

DR DR

CD CD

SG SG

FG FG

67
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63393EN/02

D When the ER and DR signals are not used for handshaking, connect
the cable as shown below.

CNC I/O device side

SD SD

RD RD

RS RS

CS CS

ER ER

DR DR

CD CD

SG SG

FG FG

Prepare the cable with I/O device as follows :

Serial
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
ER
DR

Cable : twist 10 pairs 0.18mm2, with shield

68
B–63393EN/02 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION

6 SPINDLE CONNECTION

The figure below shows the spindle–related connections.

Position
coder
JA7B SPM
JA41
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor

Main CPU Position

board coder
JA7B SPM

JA7A TB2 Spindle

motor

Position
coder
JA41 JA7B SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor
Sub–CPU
board Position
coder
JA7B SPM
JA7A TB2 Spindle
motor

The above shows an example of the maximum configuration. Any

number of spindle motors can be used within the range of the above
configuration. For example, a system using only the main CPU board
may use just one spindle, or a system with the main CPU and sub–CPU
boards may use one spindle for each board.

NOTE
For connection between a spindle amplifier and spindle
motor and connection between a spindle amplifier and
detector, refer to the relevant manual for the SPINDLE
MOTOR α series.

69
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63393EN/02

6.1
SERIAL SPINDLE

6.1.1
Connection of One to
Two Serial Spindles CNC SPM (Spindle amplifier module)

JA41 (main board,

sub–CPU board)
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A JA7B
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–E20MDT)
1 SIN 11 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15 0V
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)

CAUTION
The +5V pin is used for optical link transmission using an
optical I/O link adapter. When a metallic cable such as this
cable is used for connection, make no connection to the +5V
pins. If a connection is made to the +5V pins by mistake, a
short–circuit can occur between the +5V pins of the CNC
and spindle module, and can damage the unit.

NOTE
1 The second serial spindle is connected as a branch from the
spindle amplifier module.
2 Leave open the pins for which no signal name is indicated.

70
B–63393EN/02 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION

Cable connection

Connector JA41 Connector JA7B

SOUT 3 1
SIN

*SOUT 4 2
*SIN
CNC
1 3 Spindle
SIN SOUT
amplifier
2 4 module
*SIN *SOUT
12,14,16 12,14,16
0V 0V

Ground plate Ground plate

Recommended cable connector:

PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)

Recommended wire specification:

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)

NOTE
In any of the following cases, make a connection via an
optical fiber cable by using an optical I/O link adapter:
D When the cable is 20 m or longer
D When the cable is subject to significant noise. For
example, when there is a strong electromagnetic noise
source such as a welding machine near the cable, or
when the cable runs in parallel with a power line or power
magnetics cable that can generate noise.
When an optical I/O link adapter is used, see Subsection
8.2.2.

71
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63393EN/02

7 SERVO INTERFACE

72
B–63393EN/02 7. SERVO INTERFACE

7.1
SERVO INTERFACE

7.1.1 This chapter describes how to connect the servo units to the control unit.
General For details of the connection of the Servo amplifier α Series Descriptions
(B–65162E), refer to the relevant manual.

7.1.2
Interface to the Servo
Amplifiers Control unit

Servo amplifier modules

COP10A COP10B

COP10A

COP10B
Optical fiber cable
COP10A

COP10B

COP10A

COP10B

COP10A
Main: Maximum 6 axes
Sub: Maximum 4 axes

The connection between the CNC control unit and the servo amplifiers
should use only one optical fiber cable, regardless of the number of
controlled axes. See APPENDIX D for details on the optical fiber cable.
In the control unit, the COP10A connector is placed on the servo card
installed on the main CPU board. When a sub–CPU board is used,
COP10A is placed on the servo card installed on the sub–CPU board as
well.

73
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63393EN/02

7.1.3 So, to connect the servo check board or interface board for automatic
Connecting the Servo adjustment with the control unit, a servo check adapter and special cable
are required. (The ordering information for the servo check adapter and
Check Adapter cable is A02B–0236–K822.)

Examples of connection

When the servo check board is used

Connect TEST0–3 with CN2 of the servo check board via the flat cable.

TESTn

CA54 CN0

CN2
CNC Servo check adapter Servo check board

When the interface board for automatic adjustment is used

A) Connect TEST0–3 with CIN1/2 of the interface board for automatic
adjustment via a flat cable.

TESTn

CA54 CN0 CIN1

CIN2

CNC Servo check adapter Interface board for

automatic adjustment

B) Connect TESTA/B with CIN3 of the interface board for automatic

adjustment via a straight cable (such as A660–2042–T007#*****).

TESTx

CA54 CN0

CIN3

CNC Servo check adapter Interface board for

automatic adjustment

NOTE
In any case, use the special cable (A660–2042–T154) to
connect CN0 with CA54 on the mother board of the CNC.

74
B–63393EN/02 7. SERVO INTERFACE

Axis signal output

Connector Controlled axis Connector Controlled axis

number(*1) number(*1)
TEST0 1/2 TESTA 1/2/3/4
TEST1 3/4 TESTB 5/6/7/8
TEST2 5/6
TEST3 7/8

(*1) The correspondence between the controlled axis numbers and servo
axis numbers depends on the setting of parameter No. 1023.

Connector locations

Servo check adapter for the Series 18i–LNA

A20B–1007–0240

CN0 NC side

Axis 5/6 TEST2 TEST0 Axis 1/2

Axis 7/8 TEST3 TEST1 Axis 3/4

Axes 5 to 8 TESTB TESTA Axes 1 to 4

Pin diagram

CN0 TEST0–3 TESTA/TESTB

1 GND 11 GND A1 +5V B1 GND 1 GND 11 GND
2 CLKX0 12 CLKX1 A2 CLKXn B2 GND 2 CLKX0/2 12 CLKX1/3
3 GND 13 GND A3 FSXn B3 GND 3 GND 13 GND
4 FSX0 14 FSX1 A4 DXn B4 GND 4 FSX0/2 14 FSX1/3
5 DX2 15 DX3 A5 B5 +5V 5 GND 15 GND
6 DX0 16 DX1 A6 B6 +15V 6 DX0/2 16 DX1/3
7 CLKX2 17 –15V A7 B7 –15V 7 17 –15V
8 FSX2 18 +5V A8 B8 GND 8 18 +5V
9 CLKX3 19 +15V 9 19 +15V
10 FSX3 20 +5V 10 20 +5V

75
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

76
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.1 The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which connects the CNC, and
I/O devices and transfers I/O signals (bit data) at high speeds between
GENERAL each device. The FANUC I/O Link regards one device as the master and
other devices as slaves when more than one device is connected. Input
signals from the slaves are sent to the master at specified intervals. Output
signals from the master are also sent to the slaves at specified intervals.

77
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.2 Interface connector JD1A for I/O Link is provided on the main CPU
board.
CONNECTION In the I/O there are the master station and its slave stations. The master
is the control unit of the CNC, and the slave is the other I/O devices. The
slaves are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can be connected to
one I/O Link.
The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types of
units actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, the
assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O
points is 1024.
The two connectors of the I/O Link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable is always
connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1A
of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with a
terminator.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on Subsec. 8.2.1. Use the figures
when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.

Main I/O256/256 or less per group

CPU
board
FANUC I/O Link
JD1A I/O1024/1024 or less in total I/O Link

Control unit FANUC I/O Unit– MODEL A 2max

I/O device

JD1B
Magnetic
JD1A
circuit

Max.
16 group JD1B

JD1A

…
…

JD1B

JD1A

Fig. 8.2 I/O Link connection diagram

78
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.2.1
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric
Cable

Control unit or preceding slave unit I/O unit MODEL A

JD1A JD1B
(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A) (PCR–E20LMD) JD1A
(PCR–E20LMD)
1 SIN 11 0V JD1B 1 SIN 11 0V
2 :SIN 12 0V 2 :SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
Next slave
4 :SOUT 14 0V 4 :SOUT 14 0V unit
5 15 5 15
6 16 6 16
7 17 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)

Leave open the pins for which no signal name is indicated.

The +5V pin is used for optical cable transmission using an optical I/O
link adapter.

CAUTION
When an optical I/O link adapter is not used, make no
connection to the +5V pins. If a connection is made to the
+5V pins, a short–circuit can occur between the +5V pins,
and can damage the unit.

Cable wirinr

SIN 1 3 SOUT
:SIN 2 4 :SOUT
SOUT 3 1 SIN
:SOUT 4 2 :SIN
0V 11 11 0V
0V 12 12 0V
0V 13 13 0V
0V 14 14 0V
Shield

Recommended wire material

A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10pair)

79
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

NOTE
Cross cable connections are made between the pins (1, 2)
and the pins (3, 4).

Recommended cable connectors

PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)
52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)

8.2.2 The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
Connection of FANUC with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O link adapter.
I/O Link Optical Cable
NOTE
In the following cases, use an optical cable.
D When the cable is more than 10 meters long.
D When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is
impossible to connect the cabinets with a grounding wire
of 5.5 mm2 or thicker.
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by
strong noise; for example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source
beside the cable such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable
runs for a long distance in parallel with the cable.

External dimension of
optical I/O Link adapter
66.0
connector JD1 for
unit connecting 40.0 4–M3

Optical connector
COP1
45.0

FANUC
7.0

18.0

Weight of optical I/O Link Main body : Approx. 100 g.

adapter

80
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Connection
D Connection diagram

Unit Unit
JD1 JD1

JD1A JD1B
COP1 COP1
Connecting Optical Connecting
cable between cable cable between
unit Optical I/O Optical I/O unit
link adapter link adapter

D Interunit connecting
cables
01 SIN 11 0V Unit side Adapter side
JD1A,JD1B JD1
02 *SIN 12 0V
03 SOUT 13 0V SIN(01) (03)SOUT
04 *SOUT 14 0V *SIN(02) (04)*SOUT
05 15 0V SOUT(03) (01)SIN
06 16 0V *SOUT(04) (02)*SIN
07 17 +5V(09) (09)+5V
08 18 +5V +5V(18) (18)+5V
09 +5V 19 +5V(20) (20)+5V
10 20 +5V 0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V
0V(13) (13)0V
0V(14) (14)0V
0V(15) (15)0V
0V(16) (16)0V

D Recommended connector for cable side :

PCR–E20FA (made by HONDA TSUSIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
FI30–20S (made by HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.)
FCN–247J020–G/E (made by FUJITSU CO., LTD.)
52622–2011 (made by MOLEX)
D Recommended wire material : A66L–0001–0284#10P
(#28AWG 10 pair)
D Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended wire material is
used)

NOTE
Cross the cables for pins 1 and 2 as well as those for pins
3 and 4.

D Optical cable D Cables are available in various lengths.

For the cables for external lines, also see Appendix D.
D Cable length: Max. 200 m
Power source D Power voltage : 4.75V to 5.25V (at the receiving end)
D Consumption current : 200mA

81
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

Installation conditions D The optical I/O Link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it
with the 18i–LNA control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
D Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical I/O Link
adapter.
D The optical I/O Link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to
mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact with
other circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When mounting the
optical I/O Link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an L–type fitting
using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical I/O Link adapter.
L fitting

Required parts For making up an I/O Link using the optical I/O link adapter, the
following parts are necessary:
D Optical I/O Link adapter 2
D Interunit connecting cable 2
D Optical cable 1

82
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.3 The I/O units that can be connected to the Series 18i–LNA are listed
below.
UNITS THAT CAN BE
CONNECTED USING Units that can be connected to the Series 18i–LNA
FANUC I/O Link Unit Description Reference

Connector panel Distribution type I/O unit that handles Sec. 8.5
I/O module the input/output signals required by the
power magnetics circuit; A connector
panel for installing this connector panel
I/O module is provided for the Series
18i–LNA by FANUC.

10.4″ LCD unit An I/O interface for connecting the Sec. 8.6
(with touch panel operator’s panel and a manual pulse
and operator’s panel generator interface are located on the
I/O) rear of the LCD unit.

Operator’s panel Used for connecting a manual pulse Sec. 8.7

I/O module generator.

I/O link–AS–i A converter for converting the I/O Link Sec.8.8

converter to the AS–i interface

FUNUC I/O Unit – A modular I/O unit that can flexibly Connection and
MODEL A handle the input/output signals required Maintenance
by the power magnetics circuit. Manual
(B–61813E)

83
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.4 In a system using the Series 18i–LNA, I/O connection is allowed in the
following three configurations:
I/O CONNECTION OF
1) For the PMC
THE Series 18i–LNA For connection to the power magnetics cabinet and operator’s panel,
I/O units manufactured by FANUC are used. Sequence control for the
machine is performed through a PMC ladder. The machine tool
builder is to create the PMC ladder.
2) For the PLC: Using the 10.4″ LCD unit (with touch panel and
operator’s panel I/O)
For connection to the power magnetics cabinet, a PLC is used. For
connection to the operator’s panel, an I/O unit manufactured by
FANUC is used.
Sequence control for the machine is performed through the PLC. The
signals of the operator’s panel connected to the I/O unit are transferred
to and from the PLC, and so they can be processed on the PLC.
3) For the PLC: Using a general display unit
Connection to the power magnetics cabinet and operator’s panel, and
sequence control of the machine are performed through the PLC. This
configuration is the same as the ordinary configuration of the Series
18–LNB.
For connection to a manual pulse generator, an operator’s panel I/O
module is used. This module is not used for other purposes.
1) For the PMC

Power magnetics box Operation box

1–slot control unit

10.4″ LCD unit (with

Main Connector panel touch panel and
CPU operator’s panel I/O)
board (connector panel I/O module)
I/O Link I/O Link

Manual pulse generator

Power mangetics cabinet

Operator’s panel

D The operator’s panel I/O circuit connected to the operator’s panel and
manual pulse generator is located on the rear of the 10.4″ LCD unit.
D If all I/O signals cannot be connected to five connector panels, an
additional connector panel can be used.
D The signals directly used (output) by the CNC, such as the emergency
stop and skip input signals and servo ready output signal are connected
to the connector panel.

84
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

D Instead of the connector panel, the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A can

be used.
D I/O link assignment must be performed with a PMC ladder created by
the machine tool builder. The assignment must be performed as
follows:
1) When using a connector panel

Input: X

X0
Reserved

X6 X64
10.4″ LCD unit
X7 (with a touch panel and
Connector panel 1
16 bytes operator’s panel I/O)
· Required 16 bytes
· Required

X79
X22 X80
Connector panel 4
X23 16 bytes
Connector panel 2
16 bytes · Additional
· Additional

X95
X38 X96
Connector panel 5
X39
Connector panel 3 16 bytes
16 bytes · Additional
· Additional

X111
X54 X112
Connector panel 6
X55
Reserved 16 bytes
· Additional

X63

X127

85
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

Output: Y
Y0
Reserved

Y6 Y64
10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch
Y7 panel and operator’s panel I/O)
Connector panel 1
8 bytes 4 bytes
· Additional · Required
Y67
Y14 Y68
Connector panel 4
Y15
Connector panel 2 8 bytes
8 bytes · Additional
· Additional
Y75
Y22 Y76
Connector panel 5
Y23
Connector panel 3 8 bytes
8 bytes · Additional
· Additional
Y83
Y30 Y84
Connector panel 6
Y31 8 bytes
Reserved
· Additional
Y91
Y92
Reserved

Y63

Y127

NOTE
Always use connector panel 1. If the I/O points on the connector panel are not enough,
connector panels 2 to 6 can be added.

NOTE
The 16th input byte of each module contains DO alarm detection signals. DO alarm detection
signals X22, X38, and X79 are monitored by the CNC. When these signals detect a DO alarm,
the CNC issues an alarm. Since the other signals X54, X95, X111, and X127 are not handled
by the CNC, the machine tool builder should create a PMC ladder to monitor these signals and
indicate an alarm if these signals detect a DO alarm.

86
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
When using the FANUC I/O Link–AS–i converter, allocate input X96 to X127 (32 bytes) and
output Y96 to Y127 (32 bytes) to the converter.

2) When using the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A

Input: X Output: Y
X0 Y0
I/O Unit–MODEL A I/O Unit–MODEL A
(Can be allocated freely.) (Can be allocated freely.)

X63 Y63
X64 Y64
10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch panel 10.4″ LCD unit (with a touch panel
and operator’s panel I/O) and operator’s panel I/O)
16 bytes 4 bytes
· Required · Required
Y67
Y68
I/O Unit–MODEL A
(Can be allocated freely.)
X79
X80
I/O Unit–MODEL A
(Can be allocated freely.)

X127
Y127

NOTE
When using the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, set bits 0 to 2 of CNC parameter No. 17901 to 1.

87
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

NOTE
When using the FANUC I/O Link–AS–i converter, allocate input X96 to X127 (32 bytes) and
output Y96 to Y127 (32 bytes) to the converter.

D The signals directly used by the CNC are assigned as shown below.

Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Parameter Parameter
Skip
Skip signal write write
signal#2
X7 protection protection#2

SKIP PWES SKIP#2 PWES#2

Emergency Emergency
stop#2 stop
X8
*ESP#2 *ESP

B–axis B–axis
Fourth axis Fourth axis Spindle out- Spindle out-
clamp unclamp
servo–off interlock put status 2 put status 1
X9 finished finished

ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA

Skip 8 Skip 7 Skip 6 Skip 5 Skip 4 Skip 3 Skip 2 Skip 1

signal signal signal signal signal signal signal signal
X10
SKIP8 SKIP7 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP1

Skip 8 Skip 7 Skip 6 Skip 5 Skip 4 Skip 3 Skip 2 Skip 1

signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB)
X11
SKIP82 SKIP71 SKIP61 SKIP52 SKIP42 SKIP32 SKIP22 SKIP12

Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Spindle B–axis B–axis CNC Spindle

PMC output Servo
stop clamp unclamp Screen Servo ready
Y7 operating changeover ready#2
detected command command Display End command

SPSTDT PMCRUN CLPB UCLPB CNCSED RCHPA SA#2 SA

NOTE
For details on the signals, refer to the Connection Manual
(Function) (B–63393EN–1).

88
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

D The signals connected to the 10.4″ LCD unit (with touch panel
operator’s panel I/O) are defined as follows:
Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Continuous Start/reset
Individual Continuous Reserved 2 Reserved 1 Return Execution
cut and start
X64
SSW2 SSW1 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1

Axis Axis
selection selection Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3
X65 6th axis 5th axis

H6 H5

Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis

Magnification Magnification Magnification
selection selection selection selection selection
100 10 1
X66 1/2 path B Z Y X

SEL2 100 10 1 HB HZ HY HX

Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Return Start/reset Full of No Operation in

Total failure Door open Reserved 1
enable and start workpieces workpiece progress
Y64
PL8 PL7 PL6 PL5 PL4 PL3 PL2

Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3 Reserved 2 Reserved 9

Y65
PL9

NOTE
These signals are not handled by the CNC. The machine
tool builder must create a PMC ladder to process these
signals and perform signal transfer to and from the CNC via
the M–NET interface.For the M–NET interface, refer to
“Connection Manual (Function).”

89
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

2) For the PLC: Using the 10.4″ LCD unit (with touch panel and
operator’s panel I/O)

Power magnetics box Operation box

3–slot control unit

PLC in- Main 10.4″ LCD unit (with

terface CPU touch panel and
board board operator’s panel I/O)

Emergency I/O Link

stop, skip,
etc. PLC
Expansion
I/O on PLC

Manual pulse generator

Power magnetics cabinet Operator’s panel

D The operator’s panel I/O circuit that is connected to the operator’s

panel and manual pulse generator is located on the rear of the LCD
unit.
D I/O link assignment is factory set by FANUC. So, the machine tool
builder need not perform the assignment.
D The operator’s panel I/O signals are transferred to and from the PLC.
For details, refer to the Connection Manual (Function)
(B–63393EN–1).
D The signals used directly by the CNC including the emergency stop,
skip, and servo ready signals are connected to the I/O connector on the
PLC interface board. In this case, the signals are assigned as shown
below.

90
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Parameter Parameter
Skip
Skip signal write write
signal#2
X1004 protection protection#2

SKIP PWES SKIP#2 PWES#2

Emergency Emergency
stop#2 stop
X1008
*ESP#2 *ESP

B–axis B–axis Spindle Spindle

4th–axis 4th–axis
clamp unclamp output state output state
servo off interlock
X1034 complete complete 1 2

ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA

Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Spindle
Spindle B–axis B–axis
output Servo
stop clamp unclamp Servo ready
change ready#2
Y1034 detection command command
command

SPSTDT CLPB UCLPB RCHPA SA#2 SA

91
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

3) For the PLC: Using a general display unit

Power magnetics box Operation box

3–slot control unit

General
display unit
PLC in- Main
terface CPU
board board
Operator’s panel I/O module

Emergency I/O Link

stop, skip,
etc.
PLC Expansion
I/O on PLC

Manual pulse generator

Power magnetics cabinet Operator’s panel

D I/O link assignment is factory set by FANUC. So, the machine tool
builder need not perform the assignment.
D The operator’s panel I/O module is used for connection to the manual
pulse generator.
D The signals used directly by the CNC including the emergency stop,
skip, and servo ready signals are connected to the I/O connector on the
PLC interface board. The signals are assigned in the same way as in
(2).

92
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5
CONNECTION OF
THE CONNECTOR
PANEL

8.5.1 A special connector panel is provided for connection of the I/O signals in
Overview the power magnetics cabinet of a system using the Series 18i–LNA.
On this connector panel, connector panel I/O modules are mounted
according to the number of required I/O signals and the output current.
Up to 70 input signals and up to 48 output signals can be connected to the
connector panel.
If all the I/O signals cannot be connected to five connector panels, an
additional connector panel can be used.
The connector panel is connected to the CNC via the I/O Link.

8.5.2 The connector panel I/O modules that can be mounted on the connector
Connector Panel I/O panel are as follows:
Modules Used

Connector panel I/O

modules Expansion module 1

Expansion module 2
Basic module

Terminal block XT1

· Power supply
connection
· I/O signal connection

Connectors CE62, CE63, CE64

· I/O signal connection

93
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

Connector panel I/O module specifications

Name Drawing No. Function

Basic module A03B–0815–C001 · I/O Link interface

· 24 input signals and 16 output
signals
· Required
· Installed in the basic module
position indicated in the figure.

Expansion module B A03B–0815–C003 · 24 input signals, 16 output

signals
· Used as needed.
· Installed in the position of
expansion module 1 or 2,
indicated in the figure.
· When this module is installed in
the position of expansion
module 1, 22 input signals are
connected to this module.

Expansion module C A03B–0815–C004 · 16 2A output signals

· Used as needed.
· Installed in the position of
expansion module 1, indicated
in the above figure.

NOTE
For each connector panel, one basic module is required. An
expansion module is selectable.

Spare parts

Name Drawing No. Function

Fuse A03B–0815–K002 Used for the basic module.

Flat cable A03B–0815–K100 · Used for module connection.

· As many as the number of
expansion modules are
required.

94
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Installation conditions (1) Use this I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.

(2) For ventilation within each I/O module, each module must be installed
in the orientation shown below. Moreover, for ventilation and wiring,
allow a clearance of 100 mm or more above and below each module.
Never place a device that generates a large amount of heat below an
I/O module.

Upper side

Expansion

Expansion

Expansion
module 1

module 2
module
I/O Link Lower side
connection

(3) The environment condition is the same as for the control unit. See
Subsection 3.1.1.

Power supply rating

Power supply Power supply
Module Remarks
voltage rating

Basic module 24 VDC (10% is fed 0.2A)7.3mA"DI DI = number of DI

through the power signals currently
supply terminal on on
the connector panel;
Expansion (10% includes 0.2A)7.3mA"DI DI = number of DI
module B momentary signals currently
variations and on
ripples. Use a
Expansion regulated power 0.1A
module C supply.
(2A module)

As a guideline for the heat dissipation, assume [power supply rating 24

(W)].

95
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.5.3
Connection Diagram

CNC

I/O Link
To connector board 2 or
JD1A next unit

Connector board 1
JD1B

JD1A

CB150 CB150A CE62

CA52

Basic module

CA53 Machine side

CB150 CB150B CE63 DI/DO

CA52

Expansion module 1
(2A output module (NOTE))

CA53
CB150 CB150C CE64
CA52

Expansion module 2 +24 V power supply

XT1
Machine side DI/DO
and relay terminal

NOTE
Whenever using the 2A module, always connect the module
to CB150B on the connector panel.

96
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.4 To terminal block XT1, feed a necessary power supply for operating the
Power Supply connector panel modules and a power supply for input signals, as shown
below. Also, feed a power supply for the output signals considering that
Connection the rated current per pin on terminal block XT1 is 8A.

24–V power supply

(for module operation and input signals) Connector panel

+24V
+24V XT1(14)
0V
0V XT1(34),(35),(36),(37)

*
24–V power supply XT1(10)
(for basic module output signals)

DOCOM1
+24V XT1(16)
0V
0V

24–V power supply

(for output signals of expansion module 1)

DOCOM2
+24V XT1(15)
0V
0V

24–V power supply

(for output signals of expansion module 2)

DOCOM3
+24V XT1(17)
0V
0V

NOTE
To XT1 (10) indicated by *, connect )24 V (power supply
for module operation and for input signals) when expansion
module B is used; when expansion module C (2A output
module) is used, connect DOCOM2 (power supply for
output signals).

97
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.5.5 Pins 1, 2, 3, and 4 on terminal block XT1 are not wired inside the
Connection Example of connection panel and are used to relay signals.
Relay Pins The following shows an example of connecting the relay pins.

Operator’s panel Connector panel

Push–button switch
XT1(1)
XT1(2)

Emergency stop switch

XT1(3)
XT1(4)

Power magnetics
cabinet

98
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.6 Perform I/O Link assignment for this connector panel (connector panel
I/O Link Assignment I/O modules) as follows:
Input signals Output signals
First connector panel: First connector panel:
X7 to X22 (16 bytes) Y7 to Y14 (8 bytes)
Second connector panel: Second connector panel:
X23 to X38 (16 bytes) Y15 to Y22 (8 bytes)
Third connector panel: Third connector panel:
X39 to X54 (16 bytes) Y23 to Y30 (8 bytes)
Fourth connector panel: Fourth connector panel:
X80 to X95 (16 bytes) Y68 to Y75 (8 bytes)
Fifth connector panel: Fifth connector panel:
X96 to X111 (16 bytes) Y76 to Y83 (8 bytes)
Sixth connector panel: Sixth connector panel:
X112 to X127 (16 bytes) Y84 to Y91 (8 bytes)

X7 Basic module Y7 Basic module

X8 Y8

X9 Y9 Expansion module 1

X10 Expansion module 1 Y10

X11 NOTE 2) Y11 Expansion module 2

X12 NOTE 3) Y12

X13 Expansion module 2 Y13 Unused

X14 Y14

X15

X16 Unused

X17

X18

X19

X20

X21

X22 Output signal error

detection

NOTE
1 The above table shows the addresses for the first connector
panel.
2 X10.7 and X12.7 cannot be used. For the second and
subsequent connector panels, addresses are assigned in the
same way.
3 When the 2A output module (expansion module C) is used as
expansion module 1, X10 to X12 cannot be used. For the
second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are
assigned in the same way.

Assignment module names

Input signal : CM16I
Output signal : CM08O

99
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

D The signals directly used by the CNC are defined as listed below.
These signals must all be connected to the first connector panel.
Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Parameter Parameter
Skip
Skip signal write write
signal#2
X7 protection protection#2

SKIP PWES SKIP#2 PWES#2

Emergency Emergency
stop#2 stop
X8
*ESP#2 *ESP

B–axis B–axis un-

Fourth axis Fourth axis Spindle out- Spindle out-
clamp clamp
servo–off interlock put status 2 put status 1
X9 finished finished

ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA

Skip 8 Skip 7 Skip 6 Skip 5 Skip 4 Skip 3 Skip 2 Skip 1

signal signal signal signal signal signal signal signal
X10
SKIP8 SKIP7 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP1

Skip 8 Skip 7 Skip 6 Skip 5 Skip 4 Skip 3 Skip 2 Skip 1

signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB) signal(SUB)
X11
SKIP82 SKIP71 SKIP61 SKIP52 SKIP42 SKIP32 SKIP22 SKIP12

Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Spindle B–axis B–axis CNC Spindle

PMC output Servo
stop clamp unclamp Screen Servo ready
Y7 operating changeover ready#2
detected command command Display End command

SPSTDT PMCRUN CLPB UCLPB CNCSED RCHPA SA#2 SA

NOTE
For details on the signals, refer to the Connection Manual
(Function).

100
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.7
Signal Connections

8.5.7.1
Pin assignment
CE62 (MR–50RM: Manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
33 01
34 Y7.0 02 Y8.0
19
35 Y7.1 03 Y8.1
20
36 Y7.2 04 Y8.2
21
37 Y7.3 05 Y8.3
22
38 Y7.4 06 Y8.4
23
39 Y7.5 07 Y8.5
24 DICOM1
40 Y7.6 08 Y8.6
25 X8.0
41 Y7.7 09 Y8.7
26 X8.1
42 X7.0 10 X9.0
27 X8.2
43 X7.1 11 X9.1
28 X8.3
44 X7.2 12 X9.2
29 X8.4
45 X7.3 13 X9.3
30 X8.5
46 X7.4 14 X9.4
31 X8.6
47 X7.5 15 X9.5
32 X8.7
48 X7.6 16 X9.6
49 X7.7 17 X9.7
50 18

CE63 (MR–50RM: Manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)

33 01
34 Y9.0 02 Y10.0
19
35 Y9.1 03 Y10.1
20
36 Y9.2 04 Y10.2
21
37 Y9.3 05 Y10.3
22
38 Y9.4 06 Y10.4
23
39 Y9.5 07 Y10.5
24 DICOM2
40 Y9.6 08 Y10.6
25 X11.0
41 Y9.7 09 Y10.7
26 X11.1
42 X10.0 10 X12.0
27 X11.2
43 X10.1 11 X12.1
28 X11.3
44 X10.2 12 X12.2
29 X11.4
45 X10.3 13 X12.3
30 X11.5
46 X10.4 14 X12.4
31 X11.6
47 X10.5 15 X12.5
32 X11.7
48 X10.6 16 X12.6
49 17
50 18

NOTE
1 The above table shows the addresses for the first connector panel.
2 The signals indicated by shading are also output to terminal block XT1. Whenever using the 2A
output module, always connect addresses Y9.0 to Y9.7 and Y10.0 to Y10.7 to terminal block XT1.
For the second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are assigned in the same way.

101
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

CE64 (MR–50RM: Manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)

33 01
34 Y11.0 02 Y12.0
19
35 Y11.1 03 Y12.1
20
36 Y11.2 04 Y12.2
21
37 Y11.3 05 Y12.3
22
38 Y11.4 06 Y12.4
23
39 Y11.5 07 Y12.5
24 DICOM3
40 Y11.6 08 Y12.6
25 X14.0
41 Y11.7 09 Y12.7
26 X14.1
42 X13.0 10 X15.0
27 X14.2
43 X13.1 11 X15.1
28 X14.3
44 X13.2 12 X15.2
29 X14.4
45 X13.3 13 X15.3
30 X14.5
46 X13.4 14 X15.4
31 X14.6
47 X13.5 15 X15.5
32 X14.7
48 X13.6 16 X15.6
49 X13.7 17 X15.7
50 18

XT1 (pin size: M3.5)

1 NOTE2
2 NOTE2
3 NOTE2
4 NOTE2
5 X7.7
6 DICOM1
7 X8.4
8 +24V
9 X8.5
10 +24V or DOCOM2
11 Y7.0
12 Y7.1
13 Y7.6
14 +24V
15 DOCOM2
16 DOCOM1
17 DOCOM3
18 Y9.0
19 Y9.1
20 Y9.2
21 Y9.3
22 Y9.4
23 Y9.5
24 Y9.6
25 Y9.7
26 Y10.0
27 Y10.1
28 Y10.2
29 Y10.3
30 Y10.4
31 Y10.5
32 Y10.6
33 Y10.7
34 0V
35 0V
36 0V
37 0V

NOTE
1 Enclosed in parentheses are addresses allocated for the
second connector panel.
2 XT (1), (2), (3), and (4) are not wired inside the connector
panel and are used to relay signals.

102
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.7.2 This section describes input signal connections to be made when the
Input signal connection connector panel is used.
d Up to 70 signals can be connected (24 signals on the basic module)22
signals and 24 signals on expansion modules)

Pin number
Basic module
)24V
XT1(14)

X7.0 CE62(42)
RV
)24V 0V
X7.1 CE62(43) )24 V regulated power supply
RV

X7.2 CE62(44)
RV

X7.3 CE62(45)
RV

X7.4 CE62(46)
RV

X7.5 CE62(47)
RV

X7.6 CE62(48)
RV

X7.7 CE62(49)
RV
XT1(5)
DICOM1 CE62(24)

XT1(6)

XT1(34)

X8.0 CE62(25)
RV
X8.1 CE62(26)
RV
X8.2 CE62(27)
RV
X8.3 CE62(28)
RV
X8.4 CE62(29)
RV
X8.5 XT1 (7)
RV CE62(30)
X8.6 XT1 (9)
RV CE62(31)
X8.7
CE62(32)
RV
24V
XT1(8)

)24V 0V

103
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

)24V
Pin number
Basic module

X9.0 CE62(10)
RV

X9.1
RV CE62(11)

X9.2
RV CE62(12)

X9.3
RV CE62(13)

X9.5
RV CE62(14)

X9.6
RV CE62(15)

X9.6
RV CE62(16)

X9.7 CE62(17)
RV

)24V

NOTE
The above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first connector panel.
X7.0 through X7.7 are input signals for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, by
connecting the DICOM1 CE62 (24) pin to the +24 V power supply, an input signal can be input
with its logical state reversed. If, however, the cable is connected to ground, it has the same
effect as inputting an ON state input signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection of the
DICOM1 CE62 (24) pin to 0 V is recommended wherever possible.
For unused input signals allocated to addresses X8.0 through X8.7 or X9.0 through X9.7 for
which the common voltage is fixed, the logical state is fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocated
to addresses X7.0 through X7.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logical state
is fixed to “0” when the DICOM1 CE62 (24) pin is connected to 0 V. When the DICOM1 CE62
(24) pin is connected to +24 V, the logical state is fixed to “1”. When the DICOM1 pin CE62
(24) pin is open, the logical state of the unused pins allocated to addresses X7.0 through X7.7
is undefined. For the second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are assigned in the
same way.

104
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

)24V 0V
Pin number
Expansion module 1 )24 V or
DOCOM2
XT1(10)
*
X10.0 CE63(42)
RV

X10.1 CE63(43)
RV

X10.2 CE63(44)
RV

X10.3 CE63(45)
RV

X10.4 CE63(46)
RV

X10.5 CE63(47)
RV

X10.6 CE63(48)
RV

CE63(24)
DICOM2

X11.0 CE63(25)
RV

X11.1 CE63(26)
RV

X11.2 CE63(27)
RV

X11.3 CE63(28)
RV

X11.4 CE63(29)
RV
X11.5 CE63(30)
RV
X11.6 CE63(31)
RV
X11.7 CE63(32)
RV

)24V 0V

NOTE
The input signals indicated on this page cannot be used in expansion module C (2A output
module).
To the pin indicated by *, always connect )24 V when expansion module B is used; when
expansion module C (2A output module) is used, connect DOCOM.

105
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

)24V
Pin number
Expansion module 1

X12.0 CE63(10)
RV

X12.1
RV CB150(11)

X12.2
RV CB150(12)

X12.3
RV CB150(13)

X12.4
RV CB150(14)

X12.5
RV CB150(15)

X12.6 CB150(16)
RV

)24V

NOTE
The input signals indicated on this page cannot be used in expansion module C (2 A output
module).
The above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first connector panel.
X10.0 through X10.6 are input signals for which a common voltage can be selected. That is,
by connecting the DICOM2 CE63 (24) pin to the +24 V power supply, an input signal can be
input with its logical state reversed. If, however, the cable is connected to ground, it has the
same effect as inputting an ON state input signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection
of the DICOM2 CE63 (24) pin to 0 V is recommended wherever possible.

For unused input signals allocated to addresses X11.0 through X11.7 or X12.0 through X12.6
for which the common voltage is fixed, the logical state is fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocated
to addresses X10.0 through X10.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logical
state is fixed to “0” when the DICOM2 CE63 (24) pin is connected to 0 V. When the DICOM2
CE63 (24) pin is connected to +24 V, the logical state is fixed to “1”. When the DICOM2 CE63
(24) pin is open, the logical state of the unused pins allocated to addresses X10.0 through
X10.6 is undefined. For the second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are assigned
in the same way.

106
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Pin number )24V 0V

Expansion module 2

X13.0 CE64(42)
RV

X13.1
RV CE64(43)

X13.2
RV CE64(44)

X13.3
RV CE64(45)

X13.4
RV CE64(46)

X13.5
RV CE64(47)

X13.6
RV CE64(48)

X13.7
RV CE64(49)

CE64(24)
DICOM3

X14.0 CE64(25)
RV
X14.1 CE64(26)
RV
X14.2 CE64(27)
RV
X14.3 CE64(28)
RV
X14.4 CE64(29)
RV
X14.5 CE64(30)
RV
X14.6 CE64(31)
RV
X14.7 CE64(32)
RV

)24V 0V

107
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

Pin number )24V

Expansion module 2

X15.0 CE64(10)
RV

X15.1 CE64(11)
RV

X15.2 CE64(12)
RV

X15.3 CE64(13)
RV

X15.4 CE64(14)
RV

X15.5 CE64(15)
RV

X15.6 CE64(16)
RV

X15.7 CE64(17)
RV

NOTE
The above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first connector panel.

X13.0 through X13.7 are input signals for which a common voltage can be selected. That is,
by connecting the DICOM3 CE64 (24) pin to the +24 V power supply, an input signal can be
input with its logical state reversed. If, however, the cable is connected to ground, it has the
same effect as inputting an ON state input signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection
of the DICOM3 CE64 (24) pin to 0 V is recommended wherever possible.

For unused input signals allocated to addresses X14.0 through X14.7 or X15.0 through X15.7
for which the common voltage is fixed, the logical state is fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocated
to addresses X13.0 through X13.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logical
state is fixed to “0” when the DICOM3 CE64 (24) pin is connected to 0 V. When the DICOM3
CE64 (24) pin is connected to +24 V, the logical state is fixed to “1”. When the DICOM3 pin
CE64 (24) pin is open, the logical state of the unused pins allocated to addresses X13.0 through
X13.7 is undefined. For the second and subsequent connector panels, addresses are assigned
in the same way.

108
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.7.3 This section describes the output signal connections to be made when the
Output signal connector panel is used.
connection d Up to 48 signals can be connected (16 signals on the basic module)16
signals on an expansion module 2)

Basic module
DOCOM1
XT1(16)

)24V 0V
)24V regulated power supply

Y7.0 CE62(34)
Relay
DV XT1(11)

Y7.1
DV CE62(35)
Y7.2 XT1(12)
DV CE62(36)
Y7.3
DV CE62(37)
Y7.4
DV CE62(38)
Y7.5
DV CE62(39)
Y7.6
DV CE62(40)
Y7.7 XT1(13)
DV CE62(41)

Y8.0
DV CE62(02)
Y8.1
DV CE62(03)
Y8.2
DV CE62(04)
Y8.3
DV CE62(05)
Y8.4
DV CE62(06)
Y8.5
DV CE62(07)
Y8.6
DV CE62(08)
Y8.7
DV CE62(09)

XT1(35), (36), (37)

0V

NOTE
The above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first
connector panel.

109
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

0V

Expansion module 1
DOCOM2
XT1(15)

)24V 0V
)24V regulated power supply

Y9.0 CE63(34)
Relay
XT1(18)
DV

Y9.1
DV CE63(35)
Y9.2 XT1(19)
DV CE63(36)
Y9.3 XT1(20)
DV CE63(37)
Y9.4 XT1(21)
DV CE63(38)
Y9.5 XT1(22)
DV CE63(39)
Y9.6 XT1(23)
DV CE63(40)
Y9.7 XT1(24)
DV CE63(41)
XT1(25)

Y10.0
DV CE63(02)
Y10.1 XT1(26)
DV CE63(03)
Y10.2 XT1(27)
DV CE63(04)
Y10.3 XT1(28)
DV CE63(05)
Y10.4 XT1(29)
DV CE63(06)
Y10.5 XT1(30)
DV CE63(07)
Y10.6 XT1(31)
DV CE63(08)
Y10.7 XT1(32)
DV CE63(09)
XT1(33)

0V

NOTE
The above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first
connector panel.
When using the 2 A output module, connect the load to
terminal block XT1.

110
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

0V

Expansion module 2
DOCOM3
XT1(17)

)24V 0V
)24V regulated power supply

Y11.0 CE64(34)
Relay
DV

Y11.1
DV CE64(35)
Y11.2
DV CE64(36)
Y11.3
DV CE64(37)
Y11.4
DV CE64(38)
Y11.5
DV CE64(39)
Y11.6
DV CE64(40)
Y11.7
DV CE64(41)

Y12.0
DV CE64(02)
Y12.1
DV CE64(03)
Y12.2
DV CE64(04)
Y12.3
DV CE64(05)
Y12.4
DV CE64(06)
Y12.5
DV CE64(07)
Y12.6
DV CE64(08)
Y12.7
DV CE64(09)

NOTE
The above figure shows the addresses assigned for the first
connector panel.

111
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.5.8 This section describes the specifications of the input/output signals used
Input/Output Signal with the basic module and expansion module B.
Specifications
Input signal specifications

Number of points 24 points (per module)

Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more

Leakage current between 1 mA or less (26.4 V)

contacts when opened

Voltage decrease between 2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)

contacts when closed

Delay time The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In

addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and
I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] must be considered.

Output signal specifications

Number of points 16 points (per module)

Maximum load current 200 mA or less including momentary variations

when ON

Saturation voltage when 1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA

ON

Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less including momentary variations

Leakage current when 20 µA or less

OFF

Delay time The driver delay time is 50 µs (maximum). In

addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and
I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for output signals

By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the output
signals, all the output signals of each module can be turned off at the same
time. At this time, the states of output signals are as shown below.

DOCOM
ON
State of output OFF
signal when out-
put signal is on ON
in the sequence OFF

State of output
signalwhen out- ON
put signal is off
in the sequence OFF

112
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
When output signal is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state
of DOCOM is directly reflected in the state of output signal
as indicated above by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to
be supplied to the I/O module must not be turned off during
operation. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is
issued. Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before
the power to the CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is
removed either when or after the power to the CNC is turned
off.

Parallel output signal connection

A output signal load current of twice the level can be obtained by
connecting output signal points in parallel and exercising ON/OFF
control at the same time in the sequence. Namely, the maximum load
current per output signal point is 200 mA. By connecting two output
signal points in parallel and turning on the two DO points at the same
time, 400 mA can be obtained. In this case, however, the leakage current
is doubled up to 40 µA when the output signal points are turned off.

DOCOM

+24V 0V
+24 V regulated power supply

Relay
DV

DV

113
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.5.9 This section describes the specifications of the 2A output signals used
2 A Output DO Signal with expansion module C.
Specifications Output signal specification
Number of points 32 points (per module)

Maximum load current 2 A or less per point.

when ON 12 A maximum for the entire module
(DO: 16 points) (including momentary variations).

Withstand voltage 24 V )20% or less (including momentary

variations)

Leakage current when OFF 100 µA or less

Delay time [I/O Link transfer time (2 ms maximum)])[ladder

scan period (depending on CNC)] must be
considered.

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for output signals

By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the output
signals, all the output signals of each module can be turned off at one time.
At this time, the state of output signal is as shown below.

DOCOM
ON
OFF
State when out-
put signal is on ON
in the sequence
OFF
State when out-
put signal is off ON
in the sequence
OFF

NOTE
When output signal is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state
of DOCOM is directly reflected in the state of output signal
as indicated above by the dashed box. The )24 V signal
to be supplied to the I/O module must not be turned off
during operation. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm
is issued. Ensure that )24 V is supplied either when or
before the power to the CNC is turned on, and that )24 V
is removed either when or after the power to the CNC is
turned off.

Parallel output signal connection

The 2 A output module does not allow parallel output signal connections
including parallel connections with the output signals of other modules.

114
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.10
Outline Drawing

LEDs for output

signal checking

Expansion module 1

Expansion module 2
Basic module

CE63

CE64
CE62

Thorough holes for

input signal checking

115
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.5.11 Input and output signals can be checked using the following methods:
Checking the Input and (1) Checking an input signal
Output Signals Using a volt–ohm meter, read the voltage between the through holes
(between an input signal and 0V) on the connector panel to check the
input signal.
The through hole layout is shown in the figure below.
(2) Checking an output signal
To check an output signal, check whether the LED on the connector
panel is on. Moreover, the voltage of an output signal can be measured
between through holes (between the output signal and 0 V) under the
LED.
The LED layout is shown in the figure below.

Address
Through hole (input signal)

Bit

Through hole (input signal)

NOTE
First connector panel: Xm+X7
Second connector panel: Xm+X23
Third connector panel: Xm=X39
Fourth connector panel: Xm=X80
Fifth connector panel: Xm=X96
Sixth connector panel: Xm=X112

Bit
Address
LED
Through hole
(output signal)

0V
Through hole (0V)

116
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
First connector panel: Yn+Y7
Second connector panel: Yn+Y15
Third connector panel: Ym=Y23
Fourth connector panel: Ym=Y68
Fifth connector panel: Ym=Y76
Sixth connector panel: Ym=Y84

8.5.12 Modules can be connected in the same way, regardless of whether you are
connecting the basic module to an extension module or connecting two
Connection of Basic
extension modules. Connect the modules by using 34–pin flat cable
and Extension Modules connectors as shown in the figure below. Ensure that all 34 pins at one
end of the cable are connected to the corresponding pins at the other end;
e.g., connect the A1 pin to the pin having the same designation (A1) at
the other end.

Connector panel side Connector panel side Connector panel side

A1 pin mark
34–pin flat cable

34–pin flat cable

34–pin flat cable

CA52

CA55

CA52

CA53

CA52

Ventilation
slot
Basic module Extension module Extension module

Top view
Flat cable–side connector specification:
HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Module connector–side specification:
HIF3BA–34PA–2.54DS (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) or
FAP–3403–1202–0BS (Yamaichi Denki Co., Ltd.)

117
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

NOTE
Modules need to be spaced at least 32 mm apart, in which case a flat cable of about 20 mm
in length is required. To install modules further away from each other, the cable length will be
20 mm plus the extra distance. Note that the maximum length of a flat cable is 100 mm. To
ensure adequate ventilation, install the modules in such a way that the flat cables lie on top of
them.

8.5.13
Other Notes

DO signal reaction to a If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using the connector panel I/O module,
system alarm or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and connector panel I/O
module fails, all the output signals of the I/O module are turned off.
Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine sequence.
Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power to the CNC or the I/O
module is turned off.

Output signal alarm The output signal driver of the Basic and Extension module A/B is
detection capable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature.
If an accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an
abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, a
protection circuit, which is provided for each output signal driver (1 byte),
is activated and keeps the output signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF
state until the cause of the problem is eliminated. The output signal driver
that detected the abnormality can be determined by the input signal. The
relationship between the input signal address bits and output signal areas
is shown in the table below. When an input signal address bit is set to 1
it indicates that the corresponding output signal driver detected an
abnormality. If an output signal becomes abnormal, you can check the
PMCDGN screen of the CNC, which will help you investigate the failure
and perform recovery.
For the first connector panel
Alarm detection
DO address Location
address and bit

X22.0 Y7 Basic module

X22.1 Y8 Basic module

X22.2 Y9 Extension module 1

X22.3 Y10 Extension module 1

X22.4 Y11 Extension module 2

X22.5 Y12 Extension module 2

When an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC issues an alarm.

118
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

For the second connector panel

Alarm detection
DO address Location
address and bit

X38.0 Y15 Basic module

X38.1 Y16 Basic module

X38.2 Y17 Extension module 1

X38.3 Y18 Extension module 1

X38.4 Y19 Extension module 2

X38.5 Y20 Extension module 2

When an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC issues an alarm.

For the third connector panel
Alarm detection
DO address Location
address and bit

X54.0 Y23 Basic module

X54.1 Y24 Basic module

X54.2 Y25 Extension module 1

X54.3 Y26 Extension module 1

X54.4 Y27 Extension module 2

X54.5 Y28 Extension module 2

Even when an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC does not
issue any alarm. Use a PMC ladder program to monitor the bits of X54
and issue an alarm if 1 is detected.
For the fourth connector panel
Alarm detection
DO address Location
address and bit

X95.0 Y68 Basic module

X95.1 Y69 Basic module

X95.2 Y70 Extension module 1

X95.3 Y71 Extension module 1

X95.4 Y72 Extension module 2

X95.5 Y73 Extension module 2

Even when an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC does not
issue any alarm. Use a PMC ladder program to monitor the bits of X95
and issue an alarm if 1 is detected.

119
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

For the fifth connector panel

Alarm detection
DO address Location
address and bit

X111.0 Y76 Basic module

X111.1 Y77 Basic module

X111.2 Y78 Extension module 1

X111.3 Y79 Extension module 1

X111.4 Y80 Extension module 2

X111.5 Y81 Extension module 2

Even when an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC does not
issue any alarm. Use a PMC ladder program to monitor the bits of X111
and issue an alarm if 1 is detected.
For the sixth connector panel
Alarm detection
DO address Location
address and bit

X127.0 Y84 Basic module

X127.1 Y85 Basic module

X127.2 Y86 Extension module 1

X127.3 Y87 Extension module 1

X127.4 Y88 Extension module 2

X127.5 Y89 Extension module 2

Even when an abnormality in output signal is detected, the CNC does not
issue any alarm. Use a PMC ladder program to monitor the bits of X127
and issue an alarm if 1 is detected.

NOTE
This function is not supported by the 2A output module or
analog input module.

120
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6 When the 10.4″ LCD (with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O) (called
the LCD unit hereinafter) is used, the connectors on the rear of the LCD
OPERATOR’S PANEL unit are used to connect the I/O signals from the operator’s panel (signals
I/O CONNECTION for buttons and lamps).
FOR 10.4″ LCD UNIT
These I/O signals are connected to the CNC through the I/O Link, so that
they can be used with a PMC ladder. When a PLC supplied by another
manufacturer is used without using the PMC ladder, an image of these I/O
signals is transferred to and from the PLC, so that these signals can be
used with a ladder on the PLC.

8.6.1 The rear view of the LCD unit (uncovered) is given below.
Connector Layout

Inverter printed circuit board

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
LCD control and operator’s panel I/O
printed circuit board
I/O signal LCD signal
connection (HSSB)
CE56 COP20B

ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂ 24 V input

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂ CP1A

ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂ ÂÂ Â
 M4 stud for protective
For 24 V grounding (PE)
I/O Link (upper) MDI signal input branch–out
JD1B CA55 Connect this to ground.
CP1B
I/O Link (lower) Connection to manual
JD1A pulse generator
JA60

121
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.6.2
Overall Connection
Diagram
10.4″ LCD unit (with
touch panel and
operator’s panel I/O)

24 VDC (main CPU CP1A CP1B

board)

LCD signal (HSSB) COP20B

(main CPU board)

JD1B JD1A
Higher unit of I/O Link

Manual pulse generator

(axis and magnification JA60
selection signals)

CE56

Emergency Operator’s panel

Power stop (buttons and lamps)
magnetics
cabinet Operation
ready

This signal is not connected through the LCD

unit but is connected directly to the power
magnetics cabinet.

122
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6.3 The function of this unit is equivalent to the operator’s panel I/O module,
I/O Link Assignment using 16 bytes for input signals and 4 bytes for output signals.
Assignment module names
Input (X64 to X79) : CM16I
Output (Y64 to Y67) : CM04O
Then, the input/output signals are defined as follows:
Input signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Continuous Start/reset
Individual Continuous Reserved 2 Reserved 1 Return Execution
cut and start
X64
SSW2 SSW1 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1

Axis Axis
selection selection Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3
X65 6th axis 5th axis

H6 H5

Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis

Magnification Magnification Magnification
selection selection selection selection selection
100 10 1
X66 1/2 path B Z Y X

SEL2 100 10 1 HB HZ HY HX

X67 to X75: Unused

Manual pulse generator
X76

X77 to X78: Unused

Output Output
Unused signal alarm signal alarm
X79 65 64

DOALM65 DOALM64

Output signals
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Return Start/reset Full of No Operation in

Total failure Door open Reserved 1
enable and start workpieces workpiece progress
Y64
PL8 PL7 PL6 PL5 PL4 PL3 PL2

Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3 Reserved 2 Reserved 1

Y65

Y66 to Y67: Unused

8.6.4 See the section “CONNECTION WITH THE LCD UNIT” in Chapter 5.
Power Supply
Connection
123
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.6.5
I/O Connector Pin CE56
Assignment
A B
01 0V +24V
02 PB1(X64.0) PB2(X64.1)
03 PB3(X64.2) PB4(X64.3)
04 Reserved 1(X64.4) Reserved 1(X64.5)
05 SSW1(X64.6) SSW2(X64.7)
06 Reserved 3(X65.0) Reserved 4(X65.1)
07 Reserved 5(X65.2) Reserved 6(X65.3)
08 Reserved 7(X65.4) Reserved 8(X65.5)
09 H5(X65.6) H6(X65.7)
10 HX(X66.0) HY(X66.1)
11 HZ(66.2) HB(X66.3)
12 X1(X66.4) X10(X66.5)
13 X100(X66.6) SEL2(X66.7)
14
15
16 Reserved 1(Y64.0) PL2(Y64.1)
17 PL3(Y64.2) PL4(Y64.3)
18 PL5(Y64.4) PL6(Y65.5)
19 PL7(Y64.6) PL8(Y65.7)
20 Reserved 9 Reserved 2(Y65.1)
21 Reserved 3(Y65.2) Reserved 4(Y65.3)
22 Reserved 5(Y65.4) Reserved 6(Y65.5)
23 Reserved 7(Y65.6) Reserved 8(Y65.7)
24 DOCOM DOCOM
25 DOCOM DOCOM

Flat–cable–side connector specification:

A02B–0120–K342
(HIFBB–50D–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
50 contacts
Cable specifications:
A02B–0120–K886
(Hitachi Cable, Ltd. or Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., 50
conductors, 60 m long)

NOTE
The following signals are also assigned to the pins of
connector JA60 (manual pulse generator interface), and
may be connected to either of connectors CE56 and JA60.
Signal Address
HX X66.0
HY X66.1
HZ X66.2
HB H66.3
X1 X66.4
X10 X66.5
X100 X66.6
SEL2 X66.7
H5 X65.6
H6 X65.7

124
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6.6
Input Signal
Connection

Pin number
Address number
)24V CE56(B01)
Bit number

PB1(X64.0) CE56(A02)
RV
PB2(X64.1) CE56(B02)
RV
PB3(X64.2) CE56(A03)
RV
PB4(X64.3) CE56(B03)
RV
Reserved 1(X64.4) CE56(A04)
RV
Reserved 2(X64.5) CE56(B04)
RV
SSW1(X64.6) CE56(A05)
RV
SSW2(X64.7) CE56(B05)
RV

Reserved 3(X65.0) CE56(A06)

RV
Reserved 4(X65.1) CE56(B06)
RV
Reserved 5(X65.2) CE56(A07)
RV
Reserved 6(X65.3)
CE56(B07)
RV
Reserved 7(X65.4)
CE56(A08)
RV
Reserved 8(X65.5)
CE56(B08)
RV
H5(X65.6)
CE56(A09)
RV
H6(X65.7)
CE56(B09)
RV

125
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

Pin number
Address number
)24V CE56(B01)
Bit number

HX(X66.0) CE56(A10)
RV
HY(X66.1) CE56(B10)
RV
HZ(X66.2) CE56(A11)
RV
HB(X66.3) CE56(B11)
RV
X1(X66.4) CE56(A12)
RV
X10(X66.5) CE56(B12)
RV
X100(X66.6) CE56(A13)
RV
SEL2(X66.7) CE56(B13)
RV

126
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6.7
Output Signal
Connection

Pin number

DOCOM CE56(A24,B24,A25,B25)
Address number
Bit number
+24V 0V
+24 V regulated power supply

Reserved 1(Y64.0) CE56(A16)

Relay
DV
PL2(Y64.1) CE56(B16)
DV
PL3(Y64.2) CE56(A17)
DV
PL4(Y64.3) CE56(B17)
DV
PL5(Y64.4) CE56(A18)
DV
PL6(Y64.5) CE56(B18)
DV
PL7(Y64.6) CE56(A19)
DV
PL8(Y64.7) CE56(B19)
DV

Reserved 9(Y65.0) CE56(A20)

DV
Reserved 2(Y65.1) CE56(B20)
DV
Reserved 3(Y65.2) CE56(A21)
DV
Reserved 4(Y65.3) CE56(B21)
DV
Reserved 5(Y65.4) CE56(A22)
DV
Reserved 6(Y65.5) CE56(B22)
DV
Reserved 7(Y65.6) CE56(A23)
DV
Reserved 8(Y65.7) CE56(B23)
DV

CE56(A01)

127
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.6.8 When the 10.4″ LCD (with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O) is used,
Wiring Inside the the wiring inside the operator’s panel is as follows:
Operator’s Panel

0V
Â
CE56(A01) W
Power supply

Â
Operation in
progress PL2 (Y64.1)
O CE56(B16)

R
No workpiece
 PL3 (Y64.2)
CE56(A17)

R
Full of workpieces
 PL4 (Y64.3)
CE56(B17)

R
Door open
 PL5 (Y64.4)
CE56(A18)

Â
Total failure PL6 (Y64.5)
R CE56(A18)
Start/

O
reset and start
 PL7 (Y64.6)
CE56(A19)

Â
Return enable PL8 (Y64.7)
Y CE56(B19)

 ÂÂÂ
)24V Emergency stop
CE56(B01) R

ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Â
Continuous Individual
Selector Â
Â
SSW1 (X64.6)
CE56(A05)

ÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂ Â
Selector SSW2 (X64.7)
CE56(A05)

ÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂ Â
Execution PB1 (X64.0)
CE56(A02)

ÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂ Â
Return (B contact) PB2 (X64.1)
CE56(B02)

ÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂ Â
Start/reset and start PB3 (X64.2)
CE56(A03)

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Continuous cut (B contact)
Â
Â
PB4 (X64.3)
CE56(B03)

128
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

The following signal lines are not routed through the LCD unit and are
instead connected directly to the power magnetics cabinet:

Emergency stop

Operation ready

Operation ready
G

8.6.9 One manual pulse generator can be connected to this LCD unit. For the
Connection of a manual pulse generator, interfaces for ten input signals including six axis
selection signals, three magnification selection signals, and one path
Manual Pulse selection signal are provided in the same connector.
Generator

LCD unit Manual pulse generator

Relay
JA60(PCR–E20LMDT) connector Manual pulse generator
1 HA1 11 HX(X66.0)
2 HB1 12 HY(X66.1) +5V 0V HA1 HB1
3 +5V 13 HZ(X66.2)
4 0V 14 HB(X66.3) COM X1 X10 X100
5 +5V 15 X1(X66.4)
6 0V 16 X10(X66.5) HX HY HZ HB
7 +5V 17 X100(X66.6)
8 0V 18 SEL2(X66.7) SEL2 H5 H6
9 H5(X65.6) 19 H6(X65.7)
10 0V 20 +24V

129
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

Cable connection example

JA60 Relay connector Manual pulse generator
1
HA1 HA1 HA1
2
HB1 HB1 HB1
3,5,7
+5V +5V +5V
4,6,8,10
0V 0V 0V
20
+24V COM
11
HX HX
12
HY HY
13
HZ HZ
14
HB HB
15
X1 X1
16
X10 X10
17
X100 X100
18
SEL2 SEL2
9
H5 H5
19
H6 H6

Recommended connector:
A02B–0120–K305
(including the following connector and housing)
(Connector: FI40B–20S, soldering type, Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
(Housing: FI40–20–CV5, Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Outside cable diameter:
9.2 mm maximum

NOTE
For the axis selection signals (HX, HY, HZ, and HB),
magnification selection signals (X1, X10, and X100), and
reserved–11 signal, the +24 V power supply is used as the
common voltage. If the contact connected to a signal is
open, the signal state becomes 0. If the contact is closed,
the signal state becomes 1.
These signals are also assigned to the pins of connector
CE56 (I/O signal connector), so they may be connected to
either connector.

130
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6.10 10.4″ LCD unit I/O specifications

Specifications Item Specification Remarks

Input signal points 24 points 24 V input

Output signal points 16 points 24 V source type output

CNC interface FANUC I/O Link

connection

MPG interface Max. 1 unit

I/O power supply rating

Power supply
Supply voltage Remarks
rating

24 VDC ±10% is supplied 0.3 A+7.3 mA×DI DI = number of input signal

from power supply points in the ON state
connector CPD1. The The power supply rating on
tolerance of ±10% includes the I/O function side. The
momentary and ripple required power supply is the
currents. sum of this value and the
power supply rating on the
LCD side, which is 1.0 A.

Input signal specifications

Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more

Open circuit intercontact leakage 1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)

current

Closed circuit intercontact voltage 2 V or less

drop (including cable voltage drop)

Delay Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms

The time required for I/O Link
transmission between the CNC and unit
(max. 2 ms)ladder scan cycle) must
also be taken into account.

Output signal specifications

Maximum load current in ON state 200 mA or less
(including momentary current)

Saturation voltage in ON state Max. 1 V

(when load current is 200 mA)

Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less

(including momentary values)

Leakage current in OFF state 20 mA or less

Delay Driver delay: Max. 50 ms

The time for I/O Link transmission
between the CNC and unit (max. 2 ms
)ladder scan cycle) must also be taken
into account.

131
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

NOTE
Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DO
power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.

8.6.11
Other Notes

DO signal reaction to a If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using this I/O module, or if I/O Link
system alarm communication fails, all the output signals of the I/O module are turned
off. Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine
sequence. Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power of the CNC
or the I/O module is turned off.

Output signal alarm The output signal driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an
detection overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as
the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the
load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is
provided for each output signal driver (1 byte), is activated and keeps the
output signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the
problem is eliminated. The input signal address X79 identifies the output
signal driver which has detected the alarm. The following table shows the
correspondence between the input signal address X79 bits and the output
signal addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the corresponding output
signal driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the X79 area can be
checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC. This helps alarm detection
and recovery.

If an abnormality in an output signal is detected, the CNC issues an alarm.

Alarm detection
Output signal address Remarks
address and bit

X79.0 Y64

X79.1 Y65

132
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.7 In a system using the Series 18i–LNA, the operator’s panel I/O module
is used only to connect a manual pulse generator.
CONNECTION OF
OPERATOR’S PANEL
I/O MODULE

8.7.1
Overall Connection
Diagram

To the higher unit To the lower unit of

of the I/O Link the I/O Link

JD1B

JD1A

CE56

MPG JA3

CE57

+24V Power CPD1(IN)

supply

+24V Power CPD1(OUT)

supply

133
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.7.2 Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power
Power Connection necessary for the printed circuit board operation. To facilitate power
division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactly as it is input from
CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use CPD1 (OUT).

CPD1(IN)
01 )24V
24 V power
supply 02 0V
03

CPD1(OUT)
01 )24V
24 V power
supply 02 0V
03

Recommended cable–side connector: A02B–0120–K324

(including the following connector housing and case)
(Housing: Japan AMP 1–178288–3)
(Contacts: Japan AMP 1–175218–5)

NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN)
is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are no
indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the +24
V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off the
)24 V supply will cause a CNC system alarm. When
turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module
must be turned on before or at the same time as the power
supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the )24 V
supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or at the
same time as the power supply to the CNC.

134
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.7.3 An example in which one manual pulse generators are connected to

Manual Pulse operator’s panel I/O module is shown below.
Generator Connection I/O module for operator’s panel Manual pulse generators
Manual pulse generator #1
JA3 (PCR–E20LMDT) (M3 screw terminal)
+5V 0V A B
1 HA1 11
+5V 0V HA1 HB1
2 HB1 12 0V
3 13
4 14 0V
5 15
6 16 0V
7 17
8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V

Cable connection
Manual pulse
Terminal block generators
#1
1 7Red A
HA1 HA1 HA1
2 7White B
HB1 HB1 HB1
9 5Red +5V
+5V +5V +5V
12 2Black 0V
0V 0V 0V
Shield

Ground plate
Cable Wire

Recommended wire material:

A66L–0001–0286 (#20 AWG × 6 + #24 AWG × 3 pairs)
Recommended connector:
A02B–0120–K303 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: FI40–2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
(Case: FI40–20–CV5 (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))

NOTE
Only one manual pulse generator can be connected to the
Series 18i–LNA.

135
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.7.4 Manual pulse generator operates on 5 VDC. The supply voltage drop due
Cable Length for to the cable resistance must be held below 0.2 V (when those of the 0–volt
and 5–volt wires are combined), as expressed in the following expression:
Manual Pulse
Generator 0.2 u
+
0.1 R
m
2L

Where
0.1 = manual pulse generator supply current (0.1 A)
R = resistance per unit cable length (W/m)
m = number of 0–volt and 5–volt wires
L = cable length (m).

Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the following

expression.

Lt
+R
m

In the case of the A66L–0001–0286 cable, for example, when three pairs
of signal wires and six power supply wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m) are
used (three power supply wires connected to 5 V and the other three to 0
V), the cable length is:

Lt
+
3 + 76.75[m]
0.0394
However, the maximum pulse transmission distance for the manual pulse
generator is 50 m. Taking this into consideration, the cable length may
be extended to:

136
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.7.5
External View

Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear
Note face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that the printed circuit
boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent
interference.

24 V power supply connection

Manual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Machine operator’s panel DI/DO interface

: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark

Rear mounting area

(Perspective drawing
viewed from the front)

137
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.7.6 Installation specifications

Specifications Ambient temperature During operation 0° to 58°C
During storage and transportation –20°C to 60°C

Temperature change Max. 1.1°C/min.

Relative humidity Normal: 75% or less

Short term (1 month or less): 95% or less

Vibration During operation: 0.5 G or less

Environment Ordinary machining factory environment (Special

consideration is required when installing the module in
a dusty place or where highly concentrated cutting
lubricant or organic solvent is used.)

Other requirements (1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.

Ordering specifications
Item Specification Remarks

Operator’s panel A20B–2002–0520 DI: 48 points (cannot used)

I/O module DO: 32 points (cannot used)
(with MPG interface) MPG interface is supported.

Fuse (replacement part) A03B–0815–K001 1A

Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks

CNC interface FANUC I/O Link

connection

MPG interface 1 unit

Power supply rating

Power supply
Module Supply voltage Remarks
rating

Operator’s 24 VDC ±10% is 0.35A

panel I/O supplied from
module power supply
connector CPD1.
The tolerance of
±10% includes
momentary and
ripple currents.

138
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.7.7
Other Notes

Address allocation In a system using the Series 18i–LNA, this operator’s panel I/O module
can be used only to connect a manual pulse generator.

Address allocation is shown in the table below. Since addresses are

factory allocated by FANUC, the machine tool builder need not perform
the allocation.

Input signals (16 bytes, X64 and up) Output signals (4 bytes, Y64 and up)

X64 Input signals X64 Output signals

X65 (use inhibited) X65 (use inhibited)
X66 X66
X67 X67
X68
X69
X70 Unused
X71
X72
X73
X74
X75
X76(1st MPG) MPG
(Unused for the
X77(2nd MPG)
2nd and 3rd
X78(3rd MPG) MPGs)
X79(DO alarm detection) Unused

139
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8
CONNECTION OF
FANUC I/O LINK–AS–I
CONVERTER

8.8.1 FANUC I/O Link–AS–i converter is stand alone unit which converts from
Outline FANUC I/O Link (omit as I/O Link) to AS–i interface (omit as AS–i).

8.8.1.1 This unit converts form AS–i to I/O Link. And it makes possible to use
Strong point DI/DO signals of AS–i slaves on PMC which is provided with CNC via
an I/O Link.

CNC
and so on I/O Unit

I/O Link
AS–i POWER
I/O Link I/O Link– AS–i
AS–i
converter unit

AS–i AS–i AS–i

Slave Slave Slave

8.8.1.2 A03B–0817–C001
Ordering specification

8.8.1.3 (1) Specification of AS–i side

Specification Number of I/O points
Max. DI:124 points, DO:124 points
Number of AS–i slaves
Max. 31 units
(2) Specification of I/O Link side
Occupied I/O points DI:256 points, DO:256 points

8.8.1.4 24VDC (10%) 100mA

Power supply

8.8.1.5 2.4W
Heat value

8.8.1.6 350g
Weight
140
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.2
Installation

8.8.2.1 I/O Link–AS–i converter has been designed on the assumption that they
Environmental are housed in closed cabinets. The environmental conditions when
installing these cabinets shall conform to the following.
conditions
(1) Surrounding temperature
During operation : 0 to 55_C
During preservation and transportation : –20 to 60_C
(2) Temperature changing rate : Max. 1.1_C/min
(3) Humidity
Normal condition : 75% or less (no condensation)
Short period ( one month or shorter ) : Max.95% (no
condensation)
(4) Vibration
During operation : 0.5G or less
Non operation : 1.0G or less
(5) Atomosphere
When the unit is used in areas with high density of dust, cutting
fluid or organic solvent, the user should consult FANUC.

8.8.2.2
Outer dimensions

Unit : mm

141
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8.2.3
Arrangement of
connector

AS–i terminal

8.8.2.4 1) Cautions for mounting unit

Installation (1) Use the unit in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2) Mount the unit on a vertical surface, and allow a space of at least
100 mm above and below the unit. Do not place any unit generating
a large amount of heat under the detector interface unit.
2) Details of mounting holes

Front view
Unit : mm

142
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

CAUTION
This unit reqires a clearance on both sides for maintenance purposes to accommodate a
screwdriver inserted obliquely when the detector interface unit is mounted or removed.
As a guideline, allow a gap of at least about 20mm between this unit and each adjacent unit
if the detector interface unit is not shorter than adjacent unit, and about 70mm if it is shorter.
If this unit is mounted next to the side of the cabinet, allow a gap of at least about 70mm between
the unit and the cabinet side.

Unit : mm

Top View

Maintenance clearance around unit.

143
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

3) Using DIN rail for mounting

How to mount

DIN rail

1. Place the hook of the unit on the top end of the DIN rail
2. Push in the unit firmly until it clicks.

How to remove

DIN rail

1. Pull down the look on the unit using a flat–blade screwdriver or similar object.
2. Remove the unit by pulling bottom towerd you.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the lock when removing the unit, be careful not to apply excessive
force to the lock. When mounting and removing the unit, whenever possible, hold the
top and bottom edges. Do not apply force to the sides (where the are slits are located).

144
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.3
Connection

8.8.3.1
General connection
diagram

CNC

FANUC I/O Link

I/O Link
JD1A

JD1B JD1A JD1B JD1A

AS–i Converter Such as I/O Unit

24VDC
CP1 Terminal
Power Supply

AS–i cable

AS–i power AS–i slave AS–i slave

145
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8.3.2 Supply power to this unit from CNC or external resource.

Connecting Input power
source

I/O Link AS–i converter External power

24VDC stabilized
CP1 power
1 +24V (24VDC10%)
2 0V
3

AMP JAPAN
1–178288–3(housing)
Select a source that meets
1–175218–5 (contact)
the external power terminal

Recommended cable (using external power) : A02B–0124–K830 (5m)

(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)

8.8.3.3 It is possible to turn–on/off of AS–i power which connects with AS–i

Power turn–on/off communication cable at any time/
sequence

146
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.3.4
Connection of AS–i
terminal

Screw for detachable terminal

+:Brown

Two sets of ”+” terminal AS–i cable

and ”–” terminal are
connected inside this unit
each other.
–:Blue

1) Strip insulator of AS–i cable, and screw to the terminal of AS–i converter.
2) Terminal of this unit is detachable, and it is possible to connect cable
taking off from unit. When you set terminal into unit again, screw both
side of terminal securely.
3) This unit have two AS–i “+” terminal and two AS–i “–” one. It is easy
to separate some AS–i cables. Two sets of “+” terminal and “–”
terminal are connected inside this unit each other. Please use terminal
whichever you are easy to work.
4) You must not to connect two cables into one terminal. Please connect
one cable into each one terminal.
5) Connect “GND” terminal with frame ground.

147
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8.4 Assign 32 byte input and 32 byte output on the I/O Link
DI/DO Map on the I/O Assign name : input OC03I, output OC03O
Link
Input Output
X bit 7–4 bit 3–0 Y bit 7–4 bit 3–0
+0 Slave #1 input Reserved +0 Slave #1 output Reserved
+1 Slave #3 input Slave #2 input +1 Slave #3 output Slave #2 output
+2 Slave #5 input Slave #4 input +2 Slave #5 output Slave #4 output
+3 Slave #7 input Slave #6 input +3 Slave #7 output Slave #6 output
+4 Slave #9 input Slave #8 input +4 Slave #9 output Slave #8 output
+5 Slave #11 input Slave #10 input +5 Slave #11 output Slave #10 output
+6 Slave #13 input Slave #12 input +6 Slave #13 output Slave #12 output
+7 Slave #15 input Slave #14 input +7 Slave #15 output Slave #14 output
+8 Slave #17 input Slave #16 input +8 Slave #17 output Slave #16 output
+9 Slave #19 input Slave #18 input +9 Slave #19 output Slave #18 output
+10 Slave #21 input Slave #20 input +10 Slave #21 output Slave #20 output
+11 Slave #23 input Slave #22 input +11 Slave #23 output Slave #22 output
+12 Slave #25 input Slave #24 input +12 Slave #25 output Slave #24 output
+13 Slave #27 input Slave #26 input +13 Slave #27 output Slave #26 output
+14 Slave #29 input Slave #28 input +14 Slave #29 output Slave #28 output
+15 Slave #31 input Slave #30 input +15 Slave #31 output Slave #30 output
+16 AS–i Master Status(1) +16 Command Flag
+17 AS–i Master Status(2) +17 Command Code
+18 Board Status(1) +18 Command Parameters(1)
+19 Board Status(2) +19 Command Parameters(2)
+20 List of Slave(1) #1 – #7 +20 Command Parameters(3)
+21 List of Slave(2) #8 – #15 +21 Command Parameters(4)
+22 List of Slave(3) #16 – #23 +22 Reserved
+23 List of Slave(4) #24 – #31 +23 Reserved
+24 Command Status +24 Reserved
+25 Command Error Code +25 Reserved
+26 Command Reply Data(1) +26 Reserved
+27 Command Reply Data(2) +27 Reserved
+28 Command Reply Data(3) +28 Reserved
+29 Command Reply Data(4) +29 Reserved
+30 Reserved +30 Reserved
+31 Reserved +31 Reserved

148
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
In the 18i–LNA, addresses for the I/O link of this unit must
be allocated as follows:
Input: X96 to X127 (32 bytes) Assign module name:
OC03I
Output: Y96 to Y127 (32 bytes) Assign module name:
OC03O
Then, X+0, X+1, and X+31 in the above table indicate X96,
X97, and X127, respectively. (The Y locations are indicated
in the same manner.)

8.8.5
Details of I/O Link
DI/DO

8.8.5.1 signal input is assigned on from X+0 to X+15, signal output is assigned
input / output data area on from Y+0 to Y+15. 1 means ON state and 0 means OFF state.

Input
address bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Input of slave #1 Reserved

X+0
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

Input of slave #3 Input of slave #2

X+1
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
:
:
Input of slave #31 Input of slave #30
X+15
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

Output
address bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Output of slave #1 Reserved

Y+0
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

Output of slave #3 Output of slave #2

Y+1
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
:
:
Output of slave #31 Output of slave #30
Y+15
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

149
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8.5.2
AS–i status
address bit item bit status Condition of flag on
X+16 0 Off line phase status 1 : off line When the off line phase is active;
0 : not off line configuring process is executed, or
AS–i power supply fail
1 AS–i power supply 1 : Voltage on AS–i line is too AS–i power supply is off or too low
status low
0 : normal
2 Operation status 1 : Normal operation normal operation mode; AS–i com-
0 : initialize operation munication is possible
3 Operation mode 1 : Configuration mode configuration mode
0 : Protected mode
4 Status of automatic 1 : possible Automatic addressing can be
addressing 0 : impossible executed.
(protected mode, automatic addres-
sing is enabled and exactly one
slave is currently out of operation)
5 Reserved
6 Connection of slave 1 : connected Slave with address 0 is connected.
with address 0 0 : not connected
7 Configuration match 1 : match Current configuration is same as
status 0 : mismatch configured(desired) configuration
X+17 0 Off line operation 1 : off line
status 0 : not off line
1 Reserved
2 EEPROM status 1 : normal internal EEPROM of AS–i master
0 : failure is OK
3 Automatic addressing 1 : enabled Automatic addressing is enabled
enable status 0 : not enabled
4–7 Reserved

address bit item bit status

X+18 0 AS–i data ready 1 : DI/DO data is valid 0 : DI/DO data is invalid
1 Error status 1 : Error is occurred 0 : normal
2 AS–i master fail 1 : AS–i master fail 0 : normal
3 ROM fail 1 : ROM fail 0 : normal
4 RAM fail 1 : RAM fail 0 : normal
5 Watch Dog Alarm 1 : Watch Dog Alarm 0 : normal
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
X+19 0–3 Software edition
4–7 Hardware edition

150
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.5.3 Output signals on the list of slave area (address X+20 – X+23) is changed
List of slave according to the list output mode setting parameter (Y+16 bit 6 and bit 7)

address bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

X+20 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 Reserved
X+21 #15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8
X+22 #23 #22 #21 #20 #19 #18 #17 #16
X+23 #31 #30 #29 #28 #27 #26 #25 #24

D mode 0 : List of discrepancies between LPS(List of configured slaves)

and LES(List of detected slaves)
1 : There is a discrepancies between LPS and LES.
0 : There is no discrepancies between LPS and LES.
D mode 1 : LES(List of detected slaves)
1 : detected slave
0 : not detected slave
D mode 2 : LAS(List of activated slaves)
1 : activated slave
0 : not activated slave
D mode 3 : LPS(List of configured slaves)
1 : configurred slave
0 : not configurred slave
If you want to see which slave is connected, check LES (mode 1).
If you want to see which slave is configured, check LPS (mode 2).
Normally, you had better set the list output mode to 0. When the operation
mode is the protected mode and the configuration mismatch error is
occurred, the list of discrepancies between LPS and LES indicates the
address number of the mismatch slave.

NOTE
When the list output mode setting is changed, it takes three
seconds maximum until the list output is changed. If you
read the list by the ladder program, be sure to confirm the
list output mode status before reading the list of slaves.

151
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8.6 It can be done that reading and writing the parameters of the AS–i slave
Command Execution unit, changing the address, reading I/O configuration and ID code from
the ladder program.
by the Ladder Program

8.8.6.1
Commands that can be
executed from the ladder
program

Command code Commnad Parameters byte reply data byte

(HEX) length length
0AH Writing the parameter value of the specified slave to 2 0
EEPROM of AS–i master
0BH Reading the parameter value of the specified slave from 1 1
EEPROM of AS–i master
0CH Writing the parameter value to the slave 2 1
0DH Reading the parameter value from the slave 1 1
12H Reading I/O configuration and ID code from the slave 1 2
17H Change the address of the specified slave 2 0

8.8.6.2
Command interface of
ladder program

DO (ladder program –> converter)

address name contents
Y+16 Command flag Command execution request flag, list output mode
setting
Y+17 Command code Command code
Y+18 Command parameters 1 Parameters if it exists
Y+19 Command parameters 2 Parameters if it exists
Y+20 Command parameters 3 Parameters if it exists
Y+21 Command parameters 4 Parameters if it exists

DI (converter –> ladder program)

address name contents
X+24 Command status End flag, list output mode status
X+25 Command error status Error code of the executed command
X+26 Command reply data 1 Reply data if it exists
X+27 Command reply data 2 Reply data if it exists
X+28 Command reply data 3 Reply data if it exists
X+29 Command reply data 4 Reply data if it exists

152
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.6.3
Details of command flag
and status

address bit contents

Y+16 0 Request Flag 1 : Command is requested
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 list output mode setting
00 : discrepancies between LPS and LES
7 01 : LES 10 : LAS 11 : LPS

X+24 0 End Flag 1 : End of command

1 Error Flag 1 : Command error (refer to error code)
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 list output mode status
00 : discrepancies between LPS and LES
7 01 : LES 10 : LAS 11 : LPS

8.8.6.4
Error code

error code
meaning
(HEX)
00H Command normal termination
02H slave address error
03H Specified slave is not active. (not exist in LAS)
04H slave with address 0 exits
05H AS–i communication error
06H EEPROM error
07H Command or parameter error
08H impossible command
09H Command error (command code error)

153
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8.6.5
An order of command
handshake

Command code

Command parameter

Request flag

End flag

Error status

Response data

Execution of command

(1) Application side : Check that request flag and end flag keep off, then
write command code. If necessary, parameter data should be written
at same time. Then set the request flag turned on. It does not matter that
the writing of command code and turning on of request flag are
operated at the same scan.
(2) Converter side : If request flag turn on, the converter reads the contents
of command and operates it. After operation of command, converter
sends on error status and receive data, makes end flag turned on.
(3) Application side : Wait till end flag turn on. After turn on, read the error
status. If no error occurred and response data is included, read it. After
operation, make request flag turned off.
(4) Converter side : After request flag turned off, the converter makes end
flag turned off.

8.8.6.6 (1) A parameter value for the specified AS–i slave is transferred to
Details of commands EEPROM of AS–i converter.

address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

Set data Y+17 0AH
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 0 Parameter
Y+20 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code

A parameter value that is written in EEPROM is not transferred to the

specified AS–i slave at execution of command. It is transferred at next
power on.

154
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

(2) A specified slave parameter value on the EEPROM of AS–i converter

is read.
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0BH
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
X+26 0 Parameter

(3) A parameter value is transferred to the specified AS–i slave

address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0CH
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 0 Parameter
Y+20 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
X+26 0 Parameter

A parameter value is transferred to the specified AS–i slave at execution

of command. However this value is disappeared when AS–i converter is
turned off, because this value is not stored on EEPROM of AS–i
converter.
(4) A parameter value is read from the specified AS–i slave
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0DH
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
X+26 0 Parameter

(5) Read actual I/O configuration data and actual ID codes of an addressed
slave detected on the AS–i.
address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 12H
Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code
X+26 0 ID code
0 I/O configuration

(6) Change slave address

address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Set data Y+17 0CH
Y+18 Old slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+19 New slave address (01H to 1FH)
Y+20 to Y+21 none
Response data X+25 Error code

155
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

If an AS–i slave with address 0 is connected, this command cannot be

executed.

8.8.7
LED Display and
Setting Switch
Operation

(1)LED

(2) 7 segment LED

(3) Setting switch

(4) AS–i terminal

156
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.7.1
LED display

name color meaning

Unit POW Green Power supply to the unit is on.
ERR Red Unit Error (refer to the other LED, 7 segments LED display or status on
the I/O Link about details of error)
I/O Link RDY Green I/O Link Ready (I/O Link communication available)
ALM Red I/O Link Alarm (refer to the 7 segments LED display)
AS–i AUP Green AUtomatic address Programming available
The LED lit when the operation mode is the protected mode and auto-
matic addressing is enabled.
CM Green LED lit: Configuration Mode
LED off: Protected Mode
APF Red AS–i Power supply Fail
CER Red Configuration ERror
The LED is lit when the slave configuration detected on the AS–i cable
deviates from the configured configuration. (LPS¤ ID code¤ or I/O con-
figuration is deviated)

8.8.7.2
7 segments LED display

LED display meaning

no display Normal operation
E0 AS–i master error
E1 AS–i master EEPROM error
E2 ROM error
E3 RAM error
E5 Command execution error, SET switch execution error
E6 I/O Link slave Watch Dog Alarm
E7 I/O Link RAM error
E8 Watch Dog Alarm1
E9. or “.”(dot) Watch Dog Alarm2
00 – 31 Slave address display (refer to the table below)
88 Initialize operation, mode shifting, AS–i power supply fail

operation mode normal operation When the setting switch DISP is pressed.
configuration mode no display Display every attached slave units at about one second inter-
val. (LES display)
protected mode The smallest address Display every configuration mismatch slave at about one se-
number from configuration cond interval. (display the list of discrepancies between LPS
mismatch slaves is dis- and LES)
played. note: nothing is displayed when there is no configuration mis-
match slave.

157
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8.7.3
Setting switch

Setting switch Operation mode

Configuration mode Protected mode
DISP Display the address number of the slave units
(Next input of the setting switch is not accepted until the display of every slave is finished.)
Display every attached slave units at about one Display every configuration mismatch slave at
second interval. (disply LES) about one second interval. (display the list of
discrepancies between LPS and LES)
note: nothing is displayed when there is no con-
figuration mismatch slave.
SET Change the operation mode
note: The mode is not changed continuously, even if the SET switch is keep pressing. Be sure to
turn off the switch longer than one second.
When the SET switch is pressed for more than 5 When the SET switch is pressed for more than 5
seconds, current slave configuration (LPS, ID seconds, the mode is changed to the configura-
code, I/O configuration, Parameter) is config- tion mode.
ured, automatic addressing is enabled, and the When the SET switch is pressed for less than 5
mode is changed to the protected mode. (note seconds, the mode is not changed.
1)
When the SET switch is pressed for less than 5
seconds, the mode is changed to the protected
mode without configuring. Also the automatic
addressing is not available. (note 2)

NOTE
It can not be configured when the slave with address “0” is
attached. Also the mode can not be changed to the
protected mode. Alarm “E5” is displayed on the 7 segments
LED.

158
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.8 Check error status on the LED display or on the I/O Link.
Dealing with Errors

alarm or LED indicator status signal on I/O Link Possible cause, dealing with errors
warning
LED 7 seg- ERR AS–i else
ments LED X+18 data
bit 1 ready
X+18
bit 0
normal – off 0 1 – –
operation
configuration CER lit (note 1) 0 1 X+16 Current configuration does not match config-
mismatch bit7=0 ured configuration.
When the protected mode, use the DISP
switch to check the mismatch slave address.
The possible cause are slave unit failure, dis-
connection of AS–i cable, communication er-
ror caused by the noise.
during – 88 0 0 X+16 –
initialization, bit0=1
changing or X+17
mode bit0=1
AS–i power APF lit 88 1 0 X+16 Check the AS–i power supply and AS–i
supply fail bit1=1 cable.
This status is restored when the AS–i power
is normal.
AS–i master ERR lit E1 1 0 X+17 Turn on the power again. Because the con-
internal bit2=0 figuration may be failed, set to configure
EEPROM again. If the alarm is occurred again, replace
fail the converter unit.
AS–i master ERR lit E0 1 0 X+18 Turn on the power again. If the alarm is oc-
fail bit2=1 curred again, replace the converter unit
ROM fail ERR lit E2 1 0 X+18 Replace the converter unit.
bit3=1
RAM fail ERR lit E3 1 0 X+18 Replace the converter unit.
bit4=1
Watch Dog ERR lit E8 1 0 X+18 Replace the converter unit.
alarm 1 bit5=1
Watch Dog ERR lit E9 or 1 0 – I/O Link system alarm is occurred on the host
Alarm 2 ”.(dot)” CNC.
Replace the converter unit.
I/O Link ERR lit E6 – – – I/O Link system alarm is occurred on the host
slave watch CNC.
dog This error is occurred when the power of the
other I/O Link slave unit is off, or the discon-
nection of I/O Link cables.
It may be communication error caused by
noise.
I/O Link ERR lit E7 – – – I/O Link system alarm is occurred on the host
RAM fail CNC.
Replace the converter unit.

159
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

NOTE
1 When the protected mode, the smallest address number
from configuration mismatch slaves is displayed. When the
configuration mode, nothing is displayed.
2 The alarm of the converter unit should be watched and
display by the ladder program.
3 When the ERR LED is lit (the alarm of converter unit is
occurred), DO is off and DI is also off.
4 When the AS–i communication is failed, watch dog alarm is
occurred on the slave unit. Please refer to the manual of
slave units about the behavior of output when the slave
watch dog alarm is occured. The behavior of output signal
is according to the type of slave unit or parameter value.

160
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.9
How to use I/O Link –
AS–i Converter

8.8.9.1
Installation These operations can be done when
Start the I/O Link is not connected. (In
other words, even if the power of I/O
Link –AS–i Converter is turned on
Mount the I/O Link–AS–i Converter, AS–i
and the power of CNC is turned off,
power supply and AS–i slave unit these setting operation can be done.)

Set the address of AS–i slave unit

Connect AS–i cable

Turn on the power of I/O Link–AS–i Converter

and AS–i power supply

mode LED
YES “CM”
Configurationmode? configuration lit
protected off

NO

Press the SET switch more than 5 seconds

to change to the configuration mode.

Press the DISP switch and check the address

number of currently connected slaves.

Press the SET switch more than 5 seconds to

change to the protected mode.

End

NOTE
1 When the mode is changed to the protected mode, slave
configuration is configured and automatic addressing is
enabled.
2 Operation mode is not changed when the power of the I/O
Link–AS–i Converter Unit is turned on/off. Press the SET
switch to change the operation mode.

161
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

8.8.9.2
Normal operation (1) Operation mode
The operation mode should be protected mode in the normal
operation. In this protected mode, when the configuration mismatch
is occurred by the cable disconnection, AS–i communication error, or
the slave unit failure, CER LED lit and the mismatch slave is displayed
on 7 segments LED.
(2) Alarm observation
The alarm signal on the I/O Link (X+18: bit 1; 1 means that the alarm
is occurred) should be watched by the ladder program of host CNC.
When the alarm of the converter unit is occurred, let the PMC alarm
occur to inform the alarm to the maintenance person by the ladder
program. The maintenance person can check the LED display or the
status signal on the I/O Link (X+16–18) and deal with the error.
(3) Configuration mismatch
Configuration mismatch means that the current slave configuration is
not same as the configuration, which is configured when the operation
mode is changed from the configuration mode to the protected mode.
When the protected mode and the CER LED is lit, every number of
mismatch slaves is displayed successively by pressing the DISP
switch.
The ladder program of host CNC should watch the configuration
mismatch status (X+16:bit 7). When the mismatch is occurred, let the
PMC alarm occur to inform to the maintenance person by the ladder
program. The maintenance person can check the LED display by
pressing DISP switch to know the mismatch slave number and deal
with it. The mismatch slave number can be displayed on the LCD of
the host CNC by the ladder program.
(4) Possible cause of the configuration mismatch
The cable disconnection, the communication error, or the failure of the
AS–i slave unit causes the configuration mismatch.
a) A cable disconnection
In case of cable disconnection, all slaves after disconnection point
may be mismatched.
b) A communication error
Instantaneous communication error may be canceled and operated
normally after the power is off. Check if the electrical connection
of the AS–i slave, the noise source near cable and slaves.
c) A slave unit failure
If the mismatch is occurred permanently after the power is turned
on again, the slave unit may be failed.
When the LED AUP is lit, you can replace the slave unit with
address 0 and this slave address is set automatically by automatic
addressing function.
When the plural slave are replaced, slave address must be set by
using the Addressing Device.
d) An unconfigured AS–i slave is connected

162
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

(5) AS–i data ready flag (X+18: bit 0)

When the AS–i data ready flag is on, the data on the I/O Link is valid.
DI signal should not be used when the AS–i data ready flag is off. This
flag should be check by the ladder program.
(6) Abnormality detection circuit
Examples of detecting AS–i abnormalities (such as a communication
abnormality and power supply abnormality) are given below. An
AS–i abnormality is detected five seconds after power–on.
Abnormality flags are cleared by reset operation on the operator’s
panel.
D Example of a circuit for detecting a communication abnormality

On at all times R0010.0

R9091.1
TMRB 5000 Wait for 5 seconds

D0010.0
X0112.1 R0010.0
Communication abnormality flag
X0112.6

X0112.7

X0114.1

RST D0010.0

COMNG
D0010.0
Communication abnormality

COMOK
D0010.0
Normal communication
To emergency stop circuit

X0112.1 : AS–i power supply abnormality (A voltage drops below

the operating level because of a power supply failure
or short–circuit.)
X0112.6 : Cabled unit 0 detected. (When, because of addition
of a cabled unit, for example, slave No. is not set.)
Initially, any slave No. is set to 0.
X0112.7 : Matching confirmation. (Turned off when a difference
from the initial setting is generated because of
disconnection or addition of a cabled unit.)
X0114.1 : Abnormality in converter unit
RST : Reset input signal on the operator’s panel

163
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

NOTE
1 When a communication abnormality is found, indicate it with
an indicator lamp, and turn off the operation ready signal.
2 On the I/O Link, assignment of addresses starting from
X0096 to the converter unit is shown.

(7) Abnormality history circuit

The following explains how to record a history of AS–i abnormalities.
The circuit shown below starts monitoring the AS–i communication
and I/O Link–AS–i converter statuses five seconds after the power is
turned on. In the circuit, a history of the latest ten abnormalities is
stored in retaining type relays D0100 to D0179.
The latest abnormality data is stored in D0100 to D0107. Each time
an abnormality occurs, past abnormality data is shifted eight bytes to
the higher address. The tenth abnormality data stored in D0172 to
D0179 will be erased when another abnormality occurs.
D Data area in the abnormality history circuit

Status area of the I/O Link–AS–i converter

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X0112 D0100
X0113 D0101
X0114 D0102
Latest abnormality
X0115 record D0103
X0116 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D0104
X0117 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 D0105
X0118 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 D0106
X0119 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 D0107
D0108
Slave 0 present D0109
(Latest – 1)
Slave configuration mismatch abnormality D0110
record D0111
Operation mode
D0112
1 = protection
2 = Configuration D0113

Normal operation D0114

D0115
AS–i power supply voltage drop
D0116
I/O Link–AS–i converter alarm
10 abnormalities are recorded.
(Old data is shifted automatically.)

X0116 to X0119 : Difference between planned slave and

detected slave
(1 indicates an abnormal slave.)

164
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
1 On the I/O Link, assignment of addresses starting from
X0096 to the converter unit is shown.
2 The planned slave is a set cabled unit.
3 The detected slave is an actually connected cabled unit.

165
8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63393EN/02

D Abnormality history circuit example

AS–i power supply

Mismatch abnormality
R0010.0
X0112.7 X0112.1
Abnormality of mismatch

On at all times R0010.1

R9091.1
TMRB 5000 Wait for 5 seconds

R0010.3
R0010.0 R0010.2
Mismatch ON

R0010.2
R0010.0

R0010.4
R0010.3 R0010.1
Read abnormality data.

R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0164 Shift abnormality data to
D0172
higher address.
R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0156 D0164

R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0148 D0156

R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0140 D0148

R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0132 D0140

R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0124 D0132

R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0116 D0124

R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0108 D0116

R0010.4
MOVN 8 D0100 D0108

R0010.4
Copy latest abnormality
MOVN 8 D0112 D0100
data to D0100.

166
B–63393EN/02 8. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
1 On the I/O Link, assignment of addresses starting from
X0096 to the converter unit is shown.
2 For D0010, D0100 to D0179, and R0010, use unused
addresses.

8.8.10 I/O Link–AS–i converter is applied to CE marking.

CE Marking Because I/O Link–AS–i converter is based on European Standard about
AS–i (EN50295), this unit is not tested for surge immunity.

167
9. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL B–63393EN/02

9 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

Using the emergency stop signal effectively enables the design of safe
WARNING machine tools.
The emergency stop signal is provided to bring a machine tool to an
emergency stop. It is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier, and
spindle amplifier. An emergency stop signal is usually generated by
closing the B contact of a pushbutton switch.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC
controller enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo and
spindle motors can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC
controller is reset and enters the emergency stop state, and the servo and
spindle motors are decelerated to a stop.
Shutting off the servo amplifier power causes a dynamic brake to be
applied to the servo motor. Even when a dynamic brake is applied,
however, a servo motor attached to a vertical axis can move under the
force of gravity. To overcome this problem, use a servo motor with a
brake.
While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor–driving power
to the spindle amplifier allows the spindle motor to continue running
under its own inertia, which is quite dangerous. When the emergency stop
signal (*ESP) contact opens, it is necessary to confirm that the spindle
motor has been decelerated to a stop, before the spindle motor power is
shut off.
The FANUC control amplifier α series products are designed to satisfy
the above requirements. The emergency stop signal should be input to the
power supply module (called the PSM). The PSM outputs a motor power
MCC control signal, which can be used to switch the power applied to the
power supply module on and off.
The CNC controller is designed to detect overtravel by using a software
limit function. Normally, no hardware limit switch is required to detect
overtravel. If the machine goes beyond a software limit because of a servo
feedback failure, however, it is necessary to provide a stroke end limit
switch, connected so that the emergency stop signal can be used to stop
the machine.
Fig. 11 shows an example showing how to use the emergency stop signal
with this CNC controller and α series control amplifier.

168
B–63393EN/02 9. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

Stroke end limit switch Emergency

stop button
+X –X +Y –Y +Z –Z +4 –4
Relay
power
Release switch

Spark killer
SK

EMG
Relay
CNC control unit
emg1
+24
*ESP (X8.4 or X1008.4)

α series control amplifier SVM

(PSM) SPM
emg2
+24
*ESP
MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
External power source
L1 L2 L3

Spark killer
SK
3φ
Coil
200VAC
L1
L2
L3

Circuit breaker 1 MCC AC reactor

Fig. 9

NOTE
For the actual circuit configuration and the emergency stop
unit used, observe the specifications defined by TOYOTA
MOTOR CORP.

Brake control at
emergency stop
D Emergency stop signal The emergency stop signal is controlled as an input signal for the CNC
(X8.4 or X1008.4) and as an input to the power supply module (PSM) that
directly shut off the motor driving power.

169
9. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL B–63393EN/02

D Brake control When an emergency stop is performed, brake control is performed not to
cause the servo motor to fall. To do this, the servo–motor driving power
must be shut off with the brake applied. In actual operation, the following
two controls are required:

1) Processing of emergency stop for the CNC (X8.4 or X1008.4)

When an emergency stop is input to the CNC, the motor is decelerated,
then excitation is turned off. If the brake control function shown below
is enabled, servo excitation is turned off after a time preset in the timer
elapses.
The axis that controls the brake prevents the motor from falling if the
brake control function is enabled, and a timer value is set. As the timer
value, set a time required until the brake is applied, which is about 100
ms to 200 ms.
Parameter setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2005 BRKC

[Data type] Bit axis

BRKC The brake control function is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.

2083 Brake control timer

Increment system : msec

Setting range : 0 to 16000

2) Direct shut–off of the motor driving power

To shut off the motor driving power directly, an emergency stop signal
is input to the PSM, and the AC power supplied to the servo motor
through the PSM contact output is turned off. In this case, when brake
control is to be performed not to cause the servo motor to fall, the servo
motor driving power must be shut off with the brake applied.
Therefore, it is necessary to delay the emergency stop signal input to
the PSM for the timer value set in 1) above. For this reason, an
off–delay timer needs to be provided outside the PSM.

170
B–63393EN/02 10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

10 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

171
10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63393EN/02

10.1 The high–speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high–speed transfer of
large amounts of data between a commercially available IBM PC or
OVERVIEW compatible personal computer and a CNC, by connecting them via a
high–speed optical fiber.

10.2 The use of the HSSB requires an IBM PC/AT compatible computer or
FANUC intelligent terminal. The machine tool builder or end user is
CAUTIONS required to procure and maintain the personal computer.
To enable the use of the HSSB, Windows 95 or Windows NT must have
been installed on the personal computer.
FANUC owns the copyright for the HSSB device driver.
The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manuals
may not be used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior written
permission of FANUC.

NOTE
1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the US.
2 Windows 95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. of
the US.
3 The company and product names mentioned in this manual
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective
companies.

172
B–63393EN/02 10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

10.3
PERSONAL
CAUTION
COMPUTER 1 The machine tool builder or end user is required to procure
SPECIFICATION and maintain the personal computer.
2 FANUC is not liable for any problems resulting from the
operation of users’ personal computers, regardless of
whether the operations are normal or abnormal.

(1) The personal computer interface board complies with the ISA
standard. It can be used in the PC/AT and compatibles. (The CPU of
the personal computer must be a 486 or better.
(2) The following address space is used to control the high–speed serial
bus. This space cannot be used by other functions or extension boards.
D 16 bytes of ISA I/O space corresponding to the addresses specified
with the setting switch, as explained in Section 10.5.
(3) The connections between the selected personal computer and CNC
controller should be tested before they are used for actual production.
(4) The personal computer interface boards require as below.
1ch +5V, 1A

2ch +5V, 1.5A

10.4 (1) Personal computer interface boards

INSTALLATION The same environmental conditions as those for the installation of the
personal computer must be satisfied.
ENVIRONMENT
(2) CNC interface board
The same environmental conditions as those described earlier for the
installation of the CNC control unit must be satisfied.

173
10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63393EN/02

10.5
PROCEDURE FOR
WARNING
INSTALLING Before starting to mount or remove a personal computer
PERSONAL interface board, switch off the personal computer and its
COMPUTER peripheral devices, and disconnect their power supply
INTERFACE BOARDS cables. Otherwise, there is a serious danger of electric
shock.

(1) Set the I/O addresses before installing the board. Set I/O base
addresses which do not overlap the I/O address areas exclusively used
by the personal computer and ISA expansion board. (See the figure
below.)
When using multiple personal computer interface boards, set the I/O
base addresses so that those addresses do not overlap each other.
(2) Remove the blank panel from the expansion slot of the personal
computer.
(3) Insert the interface board. Ensure that it has been completely inserted
into the ISA connector.
(4) Fix the metal brackets with screws.

CAUTION
Do NOT touch the edge terminals (the contacts that engage
with a mating connector) of the interface board.

Personal computer
interface boards
A20B–8001–0583 New type 2

(When viewed from The I/O base address of the

the top of the board) interface board is LMN0h(*1).
The factory settings are as follows:

A20B–8001–0583
L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A
(COP7A)

Channel A A20B–8001–0582
L M N L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A
(COP7A)
L, M, N = 0, 2, 9 for channel B
(COP7B)
A20B–8001–0582
Channel A

Channel B

*1 When the base address is LMN0h, LMN0h to LMNFh are used.

I/O base address setting

(for personal computer interface board of new type 2 (A20–B–8100–0582, –0583))

174
B–63393EN/02 10. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

10.6 (1) Personal computer interface board

HANDLING (A) Electrostatic interference
The personal computer interface board is shipped in an anti–static
PRECAUTIONS bag. To store or transport the interface board, always place it in
the anti–static bag. Before removing the interface board from the
anti–static bag, ground your body.
(B) Protection of card edge terminals
When handling the personal computer interface board, do NOT
touch its card edge terminals (the gold–plated contacts which
engage with a mating connector). If you accidentally touch any
card edge terminal, wipe it gently with clean or ethyl
alcohol–dipped tissue paper or absorbent cotton. Do not use any
organic solvent other than ethyl alcohol.
(2) Optical connector and cable
See Appendix D.

10.7
RECOMMENDED
Personal computer
CABLES CNC interface card interface card
Optical cable

COP7 COP7

Compatible cables (optical cables, used for interconnections)

A66L–6001–0026#L
For an explanation of the cable length and other related information, see
Appendix D.

NOTE
An optical cable of up to 100 m can be used only when the
NC side interface board A02B–0236–J202 (printed circuit
board drawing number: A20B–8001–0641) is used with the
personal computer interface board (A20B–8001–0582 or
–0583).

175
11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD B–63393EN/02

11 PLC INTERFACE BOARD

176
B–63393EN/02 11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD

11.1 The PLC interface board is an optional board having an interface for
installing a PLC supplied by a PLC manufacturer. After installing a PLC,
OVERVIEW install the PLC interface board in option slot 2 of the three–slot control
unit of the Series 18i–LNA.
On the PLC interface board, a CNC I/O connector is also provided to
which signals such as the emergency stop signal and skip signal are
connected.
For the functions of the I/O signals, refer to the Connection Manual
(Function) (B–63393EN–1).
For the connection of a PLC, refer to the relevant manual supplied by the
PLC manufacturer.

177
11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD B–63393EN/02

11.2
PLC BOARD
CONNECTOR
LAYOUT

Function Abbreviation Connector Number Connector

Position No. of pins specification

Input/output 1 DI/DO C80 20 MRH–20FA

Input/output 2 DI/DO C81 20 MRH–20MA

178
B–63393EN/02 11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD

11.3 1) Pin assignment

CONNECTION a) I/O–1: C80 (MR20RFA)

01 RCHA 14 RCHPA
08 0V
02 RCHHGA 15 MOVE4
09 COM2
03 *IT4 16 UCLPB
10 EUCLPB
04 SVF4 17 CLPB
11 ECLPB
05 COM1 18 (Unused)
12 (Unused)
06 +24E 19 SPSTDT
13 (Unused)
07 +24E 20 0V

b) I/O–2: C81 (MR20RMA)

01 (Unused) 14 *ESP
08 0V
02 (Unused) 15 (Unused)
09 HCOM2
03 (Unused) 16 SA
10 (Unused)
04 (Unused) 17 (Unused)
11 (Unused)
05 18
12 PWES
06 19 +24E
13 SKIP
07 20 +24E

179
11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD B–63393EN/02

2) Signal connection (circuit inside the M–NET board/PLC board)

a) C80

RCHA
(X1034.0) Receiver
C80–01

R
RCHHGA
(X1034.1) Receiver
C80–02

R
*IT4
(X1034.2) Receiver
C80–03
R

SVF4
Receiver
(X1034.3) C80–04
R

COM1
C80–05
EUCLPB
(X1034.4) Receiver
C80–10
R

ECLPB
(X1034.5) Receiver
C80–11
R

(Unused)
(X1034.6) Receiver
C80–12
R

(Unused)
(X1034.7) Receiver C80–13
R

COM2
C80–09

RCHPA C80–14
(Y1034.2)

MOVE4 C80–15
(Y1034.3)

UCLPB C80–16
(Y1034.4)

CLPB C80–17
(Y1034.5)

(Unused) C80–18
(Y1034.6)

SPSTDT C80–19
(Y1034.7)

0V
+24E
C80–06, 07

+0V
C80–08, 20

180
B–63393EN/02 11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD

NOTE
1 COM1 is a pin for setting a common voltage for input signals
X1034.0 to X1034.3. COM2 is a pin for setting a common
voltage for input signals X1034.4 to X1034.7.
When COM1 or COM2 is connected to 0 V, the common
voltage for the input signals is +24 V. In this case, connect
the +24 V power supply to the opposite side of the contact.
If the contact is open, logical state “0” is input. If the contact
is closed, logical state “1” is input.
When COM1 or COM2 is connected to +24 V, the common
voltage is 0 V. In this case, the inversion of the logical state
mentioned above results.
If COM1 or COM2 is open, the logical states of the input
signals are undefined. If these input signals (X1034.0 to
X1034.7) are not used, connect COM1 and COM2 to 0 V.
2 +24E is a +24–V output pin. This pin is provided for use for
a common signal for the above input signals or for
connection to COM1/COM2. This pin cannot be used for
other purposes.

181
11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD B–63393EN/02

b) C81

(Unused) Receiver
(X1004.0)
C81–01

R
(Unused)
(X1004.1) Receiver
C81–02

R
(Unused)
(X1004.2) Receiver
C81–03

R
(Unused)
(X1004.3) Receiver
R C81–04
PWES#2
(X1004.4) Receiver
C81–10
R

SKIP#2
(X1004.5) Receiver
C81–11
R

PWES
(X1004.6) Receiver
C81–12
R

SKIP
Receiver
(X1004.7) C81–13
R

HCOM
C81–09

*ESP
Receiver
(X1008.4) C81–14
R

*ESP#2
Receiver
(X1008.5) C81–15
R

0V

SA C81–16
(Y1034.0)

C81–17
SA#2
(Y1034.1)

0V
+24E
C81–19, 20

0V
C81–08

182
B–63393EN/02 11. PLC INTERFACE BOARD

NOTE
1 HCOM is a pin for setting a common voltage for input signals
X1004.0 to X1004.7. When HCOM is connected to 0 V, the
common voltage for the input signals is +24 V. In this case,
connect the +24 V power supply to the opposite side of the
contact. If the contact is open, logical state “0” is input. If
the contact is closed, logical state “1” is input.
When HCOM is connected to +24 V, the common voltage
is 0 V. In this case, the inversion of the logical state
mentioned above results.
If HCOM is open, the logical states of the input signals are
undefined. If these input signals (X1004.0 to X1004.7) are
not used, connect HCOM to 0 V.
2 *ESP (X1008.4) and *ESP#2 (X1008.5) are signals for
which the common voltage is always set to +24. To the
opposite side of the contact, connect +24 V. If the contact
is open, logical state “0” is input. If the contact is closed,
logical state “1” is input.
3 +24E is a +24–V output pin. This pin is provided for use for
a common signal for the above input signals or for
connection to HCOM. This pin cannot be used for other
purposes.

183
12. DeviceNet BOARD B–63393EN/02

12 DeviceNet BOARD

184
B–63393EN/02 12. DeviceNet BOARD

12.1 This chapter explains the hardware specifications of the DeviceNet board
and provides connection information.
OVERVIEW

12.2
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specifications

Name DeviceNet board

Drawing No. A02B–0265–K412

Function One channel of DeviceNet function

PC board drawing No. A20B–8100–0490

Communication power 11 to 24 VDC

supply voltage (Supplied from communication connector)

Current consumption Communication power supply: 50 mA maximum

Internal circuit power supply: 24 VDC 10% 0.2 A

Weight 200 g

NOTE
1 There are two types of DeviceNet boards: the DeviceNet
slave board and DeviceNet master board. The only
difference between the two boards is the connection
position of setting pin TM1 on each board.
2 The installation of the DeviceNet board in the control unit
must be performed by the machine tool builder.

185
12. DeviceNet BOARD B–63393EN/02

12.3 When the DeviceNet board is used, the ambient temperature during
control unit operation must be within the range of 0°C to 50°C. For other
ENVIRONMENTAL environmental conditions, see the environmental conditions required for
CONDITIONS the control unit.

12.4 The slave and master functions are set by the setting pin on the printed
circuit board. The master function is factory set by FANUC. When this
SLAVE AND MASTER board is used as a slave, the facility manufacturer must change the setting
FUNCTIONS of the setting pin.
The specifications of the slave and master functions are as follows:
1) Slave function
D DeviceNet function: One slave station
D DI/DO transfer size: 64/64 bytes
D DI/DO transfer address: Allocated to the R area of the PMC
(parameter setting)
2) Master function
D DeviceNet function: One master station
D Number of connected nodes: 32 nodes
D DI/DO transfer size: 32/32 bytes per node
Maximum DI/DO transfer size 1024/1024
bytes
D DI/DO transfer address: Allocated to the R area of the PMC
(parameter setting)

Setting pin TM1

Daughter board
(from another
supplier)

TM1
Master/slave
setting pin

186
B–63393EN/02 12. DeviceNet BOARD

TM1 Master function

Connect the left and center pins on
the setting pin TM1.
Slave function
Connect the right and center pins on
the setting pin TM1.
Factory–set by FANUC
MASTER SLAVE The master function is set.

187
12. DeviceNet BOARD B–63393EN/02

12.5 DeviceNet interface: Plug–in type connector (open type)

CONNECTION

Screw

Pin No. Signal name Color code

1 V– Black

2 CANL Blue

3 SHIELD Bare

4 CANH White

5 V+ Red

Terminal block model

MSTB2.5/5–STF–5.08 (manufactured by Phoenix Contact)
This terminal block is of a type that clamps a cable.
Usable cable
Solid wire : 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
Thin twisted wire : 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
AWG : 24–12
For multiple connection (up to two cables connectable)
Solid wire : 0.2 to 1 mm2
Twisted wire : 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
For products for the EU, however, connecting two cables to one
terminal is not permitted. In this case, use the twin rod terminal (0.5
to 1.5 mm2) manufactured by Phoenix Contact.
AI–TWIN2x0,5–8 (0.5 mm2)
AI–TWIN2x0,75–8 AI–TWIN2x0,75–10 (0.75 mm2)
AI–TWIN2x1–8 AI–TWIN2x1–10 (1 mm2)
AI–TWIN2x1,5–8 AI–TWIN2x1,5–12 (1.5 mm2)

188
B–63393EN/02 12. DeviceNet BOARD

12.6 1) The relationship between the DI/DO transfer size of the slave function
and refresh time is as follows:
REFRESH TIME
DI/DO transfer size Refresh time

From 1 byte to 32 bytes 8msec

From 33 bytes to 64 bytes 16msec

Up to 32 bytes of DIs/DOs are updated every 8 ms.

NOTE
The refresh time is the time required for the control unit
(CNC) to update the I/O signals allocated to the R area.
(The refresh time does not mean the I/O response time on
a network.)

2) The relationship between the DI/DO transfer size of the master

function and refresh time is as follows:
Up to 32 bytes are refreshed separately for DIs and DOs every 8
ms. The DI/DO refresh time is obtained from the following
equation:

Refresh time = {INT (Total signal transfer size of all nodesB32)+1} 8msec
:INT: Indicates that the integer part is to be obtained.

3) Signals are allocated to the R area by setting the start address of each
of the R signals assigned to DIs/DOs and the transfer size in
parameters. According to the set DI/DO size, the refresh time
mentioned above is determined automatically.

12.7 1) The I/O signals with fixed addresses such as the emergency stop signal
that are used by the NC must be transferred separately through the I/O
CAUTIONS Link.
2) A terminating resistor must be connected to both ends of the main line.
3) A separate power supply for communication (11 to 24 VDC, 50 mA
maximum) is required.
4) The DeviceNet slave board occupies one mini slot of the control unit.
Also, the DeviceNet master board occupies one mini slot of the control
unit.
5) For information not indicated in this section, refer to the FANUC
DeviceNet Board Operator’s Manual (B–63404EN) and DeviceNet
Specifications Release 2.0 issued by ODVA.

189
12. DeviceNet BOARD B–63393EN/02

12.8 For attaching and detaching the DeviceNet board to and from the control
section, use the procedures described below.
ATTACHING/
DETACHING
CAUTION
DeviceNet BOARD Before starting DeviceNet board attachment/detachment,
back up the contents of the SRAM memory of the CNC to
a medium such as a memory card to protect against loss of
the contents of the SRAM memory during operation.

Procedure for detaching 1) Detaching the DeviceNet connector terminal block

the DeviceNet board The interface connector terminal block of the DeviceNet board can be
detached without disconnecting the cables. Loosen the two screws
shown below, then pull out the terminal block toward you.

Screw Main CPU

board

DeviceNet board

NOTE
The connector terminal block must be detached before the
main CPU board can be detached.

2) Detaching the main CPU board

Detach the main CPU board before detaching the DeviceNet
board.
For the method of detaching the main CPU board, refer to the
maintenance manual.

CAUTION
The DeviceNet board can be detached only after the main
CPU board is detached. If an attempt is made to detach the
DeviceNet board before detaching the main CPU board, the
DeviceNet board can interfere with the main CPU board,
resulting in a damage to the boards.

3) Detaching the DeviceNet board

After detaching the main CPU board, detach the DeviceNet board. For
the method of detaching the DeviceNet board, refer to the maintenance
manual.

190
B–63393EN/02 12. DeviceNet BOARD

Attaching the DeviceNet 1) Detaching the main CPU board

board Before attaching the DeviceNet board, detach the main CPU
board.
For the method of detaching the main CPU board, refer to the
maintenance manual.

CAUTION
The DeviceNet board can be attached only after the main
CPU board is detached. If an attempt is made to attach the
DeviceNet board before detaching the main CPU board, the
DeviceNet board can interfere with the main CPU board,
resulting in a damage to the boards.

2) Detaching the DeviceNet connector terminal block

Detach the interface connector terminal block from the DeviceNet
board.
Loosen the two screws shown below, then detach the terminal block.

Screw

3) Attaching the DeviceNet board

Attach the DeviceNet board when the main CPU board is not
attached. For the method of attaching the DeviceNet board, refer to
the maintenance manual.
4) Attaching the main CPU board
After attaching the DeviceNet board, attach the main CPU board. For
the method of attaching the main CPU board, refer to the maintenance
manual.
5) Attaching the DeviceNet connector terminal block
Attach the interface connector terminal block to the DeviceNet board.
After attachment, tighten the two screws on the terminal block.

NOTE
The main CPU board can be attached only after the
connector terminal block is detached.

191
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

13 FL–net BOARD

192
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

13.1 FL–net is the open FA network standardized by the FA open promotion

conference (JOP) in Manufacturing Science and Technology Center,
OVERVIEW which is an outside organization of the Ministry of International Trade and
Industry. As shown below, many personal computers and FA controllers
of different manufacturers such as programmable controllers (PLC) and
CNCs are interconnected, controlled, and monitored.

Computer

High–order LAN Ethernet (TCP/IP, UDP)

FL–net (Ethernet base control network)

Controller

Field network

Sensor
Device Actuator

Fig. 13.1 Example of FA control network

FL–net has various features required for FA.

1) Large–scale network
Up to 254 units (nodes) can be connected.
2) Two types of communication functions suitable for applications
FL–net supports a common memory function that allows each node to
share the same data at all times through cyclic communication, and a
message communication function that exchanges only necessary
information only when required.
3) Large–capacity common memory
The common memory is as large as 8K bits + 8K words.
4) High–speed response
Response as fast as 50 ms/32 nodes (with 2K bits + 2K words) can be
achieved.
5) High reliability based on masterless method
No master is present, so that nodes can be connected to and
disconnected from the network without affecting the communication
of other nodes. So, each node allows free power–on/off operation and
maintenance.

193
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

13.2
SPECIFICATIONS Item Specifications Remarks

Name FANUC FL–net board

Specifica- A02B–0265–K414 FL–net board

tion number

Function One FL–net channel

PCB draw- A20B–8100–0530

ing number

Power sup- 0.3A 24 VDC"10% (including momen-

ply capacity tary variations and ripples).
Via the main CPU board.

Heat output 6W

Weight 150g

Environ- See Subsection 3.1.1.

ment condi-
tion

NOTE
The installation of the FL–net board in the control unit must
be performed by the machine tool builder.

194
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

13.3
MONITORING D Select one of the nodes connected to FL–net as a station for monitoring
participation and separation, and use a PMC ladder to monitor, store,
PARTICIPATING AND and display a history of participating and separated nodes on this
SEPARATED NODES station. This section will explain a concrete method using a sample
ladder program.
D FL–net does not impose any restriction on which node is to be
specified as the station for monitoring participation and separation.
Determine a node freely considering the layout of units.
D On the FL–net setting screen of the CNC determined as the station for
monitoring participation and separation, assign a list of participating
nodes to the R area of the PMC. The figure shows assignment to
R2000.

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
R2000 Node 7 Node 6 Node 5 Node 4 Node 3 Node 2 Node 1 (Reserved)

R2001 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13 Node 12 Node 11 Node 10 Node 9 Node 8

:
R2031 (Reserved) Node 254 Node 253 Node 252 Node 251 Node 250 Node 249 Node 248

D Each bit indicates participation or separation of the corresponding

node. A change from 0 to 1 means participation, and a change from
1 to 0 means separation.
D Eight nodes are monitored per ladder scan. Therefore, all nodes are
monitored by 32 scans. If a change is detected, it is stored as history
data in the D area as well as the time at which the change was made.
D One record of history data is six bytes long, consisting of a node
number, participation/separation flag, the day of occurrence, hour,
minute, and second. The latest 10 records are stored.
The records are stored so that the first record always contains the latest
history data. As data becomes older, it is shifted, and data that
becomes older than the 10 records is erased.
The following figure shows an example in which history data is placed
in D7000.

Byte 1 2 3 4 5 Byte 6
Participation/ Day of
D7000 (1st record) Node separation occurrence
Hour Minute Second Latest data
D7006 (2nd record) ↑
: ↓

D7054 (10th record) Old data

D A data table is used to display history data. Set data groups as follows,
and switch among records by using page keys.

195
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

Setting data groups

Displaying history data

←Node number (node 3)

←1: Participation, 0: Separation
←Day of occurrence (10)
←Hour (16 o’clock)
←Minute (45 minutes)
←Second (30 seconds)

NOTE
Each node number is assigned to only one byte for space
saving. On the PMC data table screen, however, node
numbers are indicated with a sign, so node numbers 128
and up are indicated as negative values. For this reason,
set node numbers to values not greater than 127. If you find
this specification inconvenient, assign each node number to
two bytes.

D Sample ladder program

This sample ladder program compares the previous participating
nodes and current participating nodes to monitor node participation
and separation. The program monitors eight nodes per scan, and
monitors all nodes with 32 scans.

(Processing flow)
<1> From the list of the present participating nodes and the list of the
previous participating nodes, acquire one byte of information (for
eight nodes).
<2> Exclusive OR the information <1> to obtain any bit that made a
change.
<3> Obtain the change status (participation or separation) and bit number
of the bit that made a change in <2>.
<4> Shift the history to allocate a new history area.
<5> Set the node number, participation/separation flag, day of
occurrence, hour, minute, and second.

196
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

<6> Repeat steps <3> to <5> as necessary.

<7> Update the table index for the next scan.
P1900
Current participating nodes
R2000
[0] P1910P1917
Table index <3>
R2212 0 to 31
[n] Obtain change status
R2230.0

[31] Obtain bit number

R2032
R2231
Previous participating
Comparison register 1 nodes
R2220 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 R2100
<1> [0]
EOR
P1920
Comparison register 2
<1> WINDR instruction
R2221 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 [n]
<5>
<2>
Difference bit register D7000
[31]
R2222 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 R2132 D7006

<4>
<7>Update index (+1)
D7060

To increase history items, change the copy size of the second net of P1920.
An area for this must also be allocated.

When changing the number of

history items to 20
(20–1) x 6 = 114
Change 54 to 114.
R9091.1 ACT
SUB45 0054
MOV
N D7000
HISNOD

D7006
LASHIS

197
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

D Sample ladder program

Ladder diagram

FL–net ready

FL–net monitor

198
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

Ladder diagram

199
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

Ladder diagram

200
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

Ladder diagram

Set status of bit 0

Change status
(participation: 1/separation: 0)

Set status of bit 1

Change status
(participation: 1/separation: 0)

201
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

Ladder diagram

Set status of bit 2

Change status
(participation: 1/separation: 0)

Set status of bit 3

Change status
(participation: 1/separation: 0)

202
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

Ladder diagram

Set status of bit 4

Change status
(participation: 1/separation: 0)

Set status of bit 5

Change status
(participation: 1/separation: 0)

203
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

Ladder diagram

Set status of bit 6

Change status
(participation: 1/separation: 0)

Set status of bit 7

Change status
(participation: 1/separation: 0)

204
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

Ladder diagram

Set history

205
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

Ladder diagram

206
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

Ladder diagram

207
13. FL–net BOARD B–63393EN/02

Ladder diagram

208
B–63393EN/02 13. FL–net BOARD

13.4
MISCELLANEOUS 1) The FL–net interface is 10Base–T.
2) For details, refer to “FANUC FL–net Board Operator’s Manual
(B–63434EN) ” to be issued separately.

209
14. M–NET BOARD B–63393EN/02

14 M–NET BOARD

210
B–63393EN/02 14. M–NET BOARD

14.1 The M–NET board is the interface board used to connect the Series
18i–LNA with the PLC via the M–NET.
OVERVIEW

14.2
SPECIFICATIONS Item Specifications Remarks

Name FANUC M–NET board

Specifica- A02B–0265–K415 M–NET board

tion number

Function One M–NET channel

PCB draw- A20B–8100–0350

ing number

Power sup- 0.3A 24 VDC"10% (including momen-

ply capacity tary variations and ripples).
Via the main board.

Heat output 6W

Weight 150g

Environ- See Subsection 3.1.1.

ment condi-
tion

NOTE
The installation of the M–NET board in the control unit must
be performed by the machine tool builder.

211
14. M–NET BOARD B–63393EN/02

14.3
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR

Terminal block

M–NET interface

Jumper pin ST1

Short–circuit: 240 W terminat-
ing resistor
Open: No terminating resistor

Terminal block model

MSTB2.5/5–STF–5.08 (manufactured by Phoenix Contact)
This terminal block is of a type that clamps a cable.
Usable cable
Solid wire : 0.25 to 2.5 mm2
Thin twisted wire : 0.25 to 2.5 mm2
AWG : 24–12
For multiple connection (up to two cables connectable)
Solid wire : 0.2 to 1 mm2
Twisted wire : 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
For products for the EU, however, connecting two cables to one
terminal is not permitted. In this case, use the twin rod terminal (0.5
to 1.5 mm2) manufactured by Phoenix Contact.
AI–TWIN2x0,5–8 (0.5 mm2)
AI–TWIN2x0,75–8 AI–TWIN2x0,75–10 (0.75 mm2)
AI–TWIN2x1–8 AI–TWIN2x1–10 (1 mm2)
AI–TWIN2x1,5–8 AI–TWIN2x1,5–12 (1.5 mm2)
Perform line termination with the jumper pin ST1 shown in the figure.

212
B–63393EN/02 14. M–NET BOARD

14.4 The figure below show an example of cable connection.

CABLE
CONNECTION

Series 18i–LNA
M–NET board

213
APPENDIX
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

A EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT AND CONNECTOR

Series 18i–LNA control unit A02B–0266–B501, B506 Fig. U1

10.4″ LCD unit A02B–0265–C087 Fig. U2
Detachable LCD/MDI A02B–0166–C291#R Fig. U3
(with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)
HSSB interface board type 2 (1CH) on the personal A02B–8001–0583 Fig. U4
computer side
HSSB interface board type 2 (2CH) on the personal A02B–8001–0582
computer side
Manual pulse generator A860–0202– T001 Fig. U5
Pendant manual pulse generator A860–0202– T004 to T015 Fig. U6
Punch panel (narrow type) 1m A02B–0120–C191 Fig. U7
2m A02B–0120–C192
5m A02B–0120–C193

217
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

172 (for 3–slot type)

60 (for 1–slot type)

Slot 1

Slot 3 Slot 2

Memory card

Weight: For 1–slot type, 0.7 kg

For 3–slot type, 1.9 kg
For both types, the stated weight does
not include printed–circuit boards in-
serted in the slots.

Fig. U1 Series 18i–LNA control unit

218
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

5 280 5

5
220

210
5

290
4–f4

4–M3
Mounting hole layout diagram
(The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.)
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel sheet metal
on the rear surface.
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Weight: 2.5 kg

Fig. U2 10.4″ LCD Unit (with touch panel and operator’s panel I/O)

219
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

weight: 3.5kg

Fig. U3 Detachable LCD/MDI

220
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

–0582 –0583
Weight: 0.2 kg

Fig. U4 High–speed serial bus interface board type 2 (PC)

Specification No.: A20B–8001–0583 (1 CH)
A20B–8001–0582 (2 CH)

221
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

8.35
f80.0
f55.0
50.0
30.0

M4X8.0

60.0

On the f72 circumference

PULSE GENERATOR
11.0

FANUC LTD
0V 5V A B

M3 screw terminal
120.0°

Fig. U5 External dimensions of manual pulse generator

Specification No.: A860–0202–T001

222
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

A860–0202–T004 to T009
90 38.0
25

M3 screw terminal
140

100.0
39.0
M3 screw terminal

A860–0202–T010 to T015

90 38.0
25

M3 screw terminal
140

100.0
39.0

M3 screw terminal

Fig. U6 External dimensions of pendant–type manual pulse generator

Specification No.: A860–0202–T004 to TT015

223
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel

sheet metal on the rear surface.

The following is the panel cut layout drawing of this punch panel.
100
115

20

2–M3

Fig. U7 Punch Panel (Narrow Type)

Specification No.: A02B–0120–C191 (cable length 1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (cable length 2 m)
A02B–0120–C193 (cable length 5 m)

224
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

Connectors
Fig. title Specification No. Fig. No.

PCR connector (soldering type) PCR–E20FS Fig.C1 (a)

FI40 connector FI40–2015S Fig.C1 (b)

Connector case (HONDA PCR type) PCR–V20LA/PCR–V20LB Fig.C2 (a)

Connector case (HIROSE FI type) FI–20–CV Fig.C2 (b)

Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type) FCN–240C20–Y/S Fig.C2 (c)

Connector case (HIROSE PCR type) FI–20–CV7 Fig.C2 (d)

AMP connector (1) for servo side AMP1–178128–3 Fig.C3 (a)

AMP connector (2) for servo side AMP2–178128–3 Fig.C3 (b)

AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply AMP1–178288–3 Fig.C3 (c)

AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply AMP2–178288–3 Fig.C3 (d)

Contact for AMP connector AMP1–175218–2/5 Fig.C3 (e)

AMP1–175196–2/5

HONDA connector (case) Fig.C4 (a)

HONDA connector (angled case) Fig.C4 (b)

HONDA connector (male) Fig.C4 (c)

HONDA connector (female) Fig.C4 (d)

HONDA connector (terminal layout) Fig.C4 (e)

Connector (FCI Japan)(3 pins/brown) SMS3PN–5 Fig.C5

Connector for HIROSE flat cable HIF3BB–50D–2.54R Fig.C6

HIT3BB–34D–2.54R

Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10–DC20 Fig.C7 (a)

Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10–C2–3 Fig.C7 (b)

Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface Fig.C8 (a)

Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector Fig.C8 (b)

Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) MRH–50FD Fig. C9

Faston terminal A02B–0166–K330 Fig. C10

225
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

TYPE : HONDA PCR–E20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)

USAGE : GENERAL
MATING
HOUSING : HONDA PCR–E20L (PLASTIC)

A
n
2 1.27 1
7.3

n n)1
2

Display
HONDA
7
15.1

1.27
B

A B
PCR–E20FS 21.65 11.43

Fig. C1 (a) PCR connector (soldering type)

226
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

TYPE : HIROSE FI40–2015S

USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING : HIROSE FI–20–CV

16.25 15_
11.43
1.27
Note
This connector does not
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 have contacts for positions
11,13,15,17, and 19.
5.5
2.2

9.2
1.7
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

13.35
19.2

Tab for
shield
connection
7

(4)
4.3
3

(3)
5
8.5

1.8 (1)

(2)
2.4 2.4
A A

Section AA S 20 18 16 14 12
(Standard 1/10)
See from the back (soldering side)
10 8 6 4 2

9 7 5 3 1

Fig. C1 (b) FI40 connector

227
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

TYPE : HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)

USAGE : GENERAL

9.5

21 11.4

(1)

HONDA
(2)
37

30

(3) (6)

(5)

(4)

(1) (2) Case

(3) Cable clamp
(4) Lock bracket
(5) Lock lever
(6) Set screw for cable clamp

Fig. C2 (a) Connector case (HONDA PCR type)

228
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

TYPE : HIROSE FI–20–CV

USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE

(1) (2) Case

(3) Lock bracket
(4) Lock lever
(5) Cable clamp
(6) Set screw for cable clamp

21±0.3
11.5±0.3
9.5±0.2
(5)

(6)

(4)
37"0.5
17.5"0.3

(3)

30±0.3
(2) (1)

Fig. C2 (b) Connector case (HIROSE FI type)

229
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

TYPE : FUJITSU FCN–240C20–Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)

USAGE : GENERAL

9.5

21 11.4
(2)

F
C020–02
37

30

Cable clamp
Screw

Lock lever

Fig. C2 (c) Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type)

230
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

TYPE : FI–20–CV7
USAGE : GENERAL
(Cannot be used on the main
CPU board or the sub–CPU
board of the Series 18i–LNA.)

Fig. C2 (d) Connector case (PCR type (Hirose Electric))

231
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

TYPE : AMP1–178128–3

(25.5) Circuit No.

DIMENSION
3 2 1
AMP D–3

22.8
16.3

19.24

0.6
10.16
5.08

7.15
4.05

6.55
3.1

3 2 1

Circuit No.

Fig. C3 (a) AMP connector (1)

232
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

TYPE : AMP2–178128–3

Circuit No.
(29.7)
DIMENSION
3 2 1
AMP D–3

22.8 " 0.3

Y

16.3" 0.3

(19.24)

0.6 " 0.3

10.16
5.08
" 0.3

" 0.3
7.15
4.05

6.55
3.1

3 2 1

Cricuit No.

Fig. C3 (b) AMP connector (2)

233
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

TYPE : AMP1–178288–3

USAGE : POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1A 3

+24V INPUT 2 0V
1 +24V

(22.96) Circuit No.

DIMENSION
3 2 1
AMP D–3

X 22.8
16.3

16.7
0.6

7.62
3.81

7.15
4.05

6.55
3.1

3 2 1

Circuit No.

Fig. C3 (c) AMPconnector (3)

234
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

TYPE : AMP2–178288–3

USAGE : POWER CP1B 3

+24V OUTPUT 2 0V
1 +24V

DIMENSION Circuit No.

0.6

7.15
6.55

3 2 1

Circuit No.

Fig. C3 (d) AMP connector (4)

235
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

SEPARATE : AMP1–175218–2(Gold coated)

AMP1–175218–5(Tin coated)
REEL : AMP1–175196–2(Gold coated)
AMP1–175196–5(Tin coated)
WIRE : AWG 16, 18, 20
(21.8) A–A
±0.4
2.9

2.9 " 0.5

1
In case of reel
±0.5 3
B–B
17.8
±0.4
4.2
(9.3) (2.5) B
±0.2 A
2.9

" 0.5
" 0.2

5.5
3.4

–AMP
" 0.2

(f2.6)
2.5

(1.7) PLATING 1D–MARK

A B
PRESSER 1D–MARK

Fig. C3 (e) Contact for AMP connector

236
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

(2)

(4)
(1)

(3)

C
(5)

A (D)
(B)

Symbol Number of
Specification A (B) C (D) terminals
MR–20LMH (Plug)
39.3 44.9 39.8 17 20
MR–20LFH (Jack)
MR–50LMH (Plug)
67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
MR–50LFH (Jack)

Symbol Name
Outer diameter of the cable
1 Connector cover MR–20L dia.10mm max
2 Cable clamp MR–50L dia.16mm max
3 Stopper
4 Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
5
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)

Fig. C4 (a) HONDA connector (case)

237
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

External dimensions of 50–pin connector

Fig. C4 (b) Honda connector (angled–type case)

238
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

13 2–M2

A
B

(1)

2.4
18.1

(2)
8.5

(3)

14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA

8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Number of
A B
terminals
MR–20RMH 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RHF 61.4 56.4 50

Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
3 Connector (MR–20,–50MH)

Fig. C4 (c) HONDA connector (male)

239
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

13 2–M2

B
A

(1)

2.4
19.9

8.4
10.9

(2)
(3)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA

8 9 10 11 12 13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Number of
A B terminals
MR–20RMH 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RMH 61.4 56.4 50

Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
3 Connector ( MR–20,– 50FH)

Fig. C4 (d) HONDA connector (female)

240
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
MR–50MH
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (50–core, plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
MR–50FH
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (50–core, jack)
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
MR–20MH
8 9 10 11 12 13 (20–core, plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
MR–20FH
8 9 10 11 12 13 (20–core, jack)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fig. C4 (e) HONDA connector (terminal layout)

241
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

19.06" 0.2
3

32 max.
5.08
2
1

6 ±0.2
7.7

30

Manufacturer : FCI Japan Corp.

Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)
Connector housing for cable SMS3PNS–5 Brown
For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.

Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)

Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm

Fig. C5 Connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)

242
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (HIROSE ELEC. CO.)

Specification HIROSE ELEC. CO.
HIF3BB–50D–2. 54R (50contacts)

HIF3BA

15.6

14.4
HIF3BB

1.27 1.27 1.09

1.27

Section A–A’ Section B–B’ ASS’Y DIAGRAM

MAIN BODY PROTECTOR CRAMP

A A A
2.54

D
6.0

A A’ B

3.6
6.0

6.0
1.27 2.54
B’ 3.81
B
D
3.8 :1
3.5
:2

:3

5.1
7.0 3.5
7.0

10.5

0.95
0.3

8.5
1.05
2.3 2.3
2.7

C 3.5
4.5

Dimensions
No.of
Description A B C D
contact
HIF3BB–34D–2.54R 34 47.75 40.64 41.91 43.23

HIF3BB–50D–2.54R 50 68.07 60.96 62.23 63.6

FLAT CABLE CONNECTOR CONTACT NUMBER (HIROSE)

A01 MARK (SIDE)

20PINS POLARITY GUIDANCE

ROW A
ROW B
01 03 05 07 09
02 04 06 08 10
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
50PINS

ROW A
ROW B
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.

Fig. C6 Connector for HIROSE Flat cable

243
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

+0.2
18

2 (pitch)

±0.15
13
0
20.5 –0.3

+0.3
21.6 0

Fig. C7 (a) Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)

244
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

Section A–A

Contact position

Detailed contact diagram

Excluding the crimp terminal

Product name

Fig. C7 (b) Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)

245
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

H
J
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7
B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2
C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
C A–A cross section
B F
A 10

E D G

6.1 10
A 10
2–3.05f
10.8

Fig. C8 (a) Punch panel connector for reader/puncher interface

Small round
M2.6 P0.45 screw Interlock screw head screw
1.2groove

6.1

12.7
1.2
6.2 Spring washer

Fig. C8 (b) Locking plate plate for reader/puncher interface connector

246
 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
B–63393EN/02 AND CONNECTOR

Honda MR type, 50 pins, male, connection printed circuit board soldering type connector
Type No. Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
MRH–50FD

Pin configuration of Honda MR connector, 50 pins, male

19

Viewed from the connector side

Fig. C9 Honda connector

247
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
AND CONNECTOR B–63393EN/02

Type: Faston terminal

Use: Frame grounding
Applicable housing: 170604–1 manufactured by AMP Japan, Ltd. or
FVDDF2–250 TYPE I (blue) manufactured by Japan Solderless terminal MFG. co.Ltd.
Dimensions:

7.62
Applicable wire
1.25 to 2.27 mm2
7.75

21.59

Fig. C10 Faston Terminal

248
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

B 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

249
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02

B.1 This section provides supplementary information about the

recommended (FANUC–approved) 20–pin interface connectors used
OVERVIEW with the following target model.

B.2 FANUC i series

(Including the Series 18i–LNA and Power Mate i–LNA)
ADDITIONAL
TARGET MODEL

B.3
BOARD–MOUNTED
CONNECTORS

B.3.1 Models: PCR–EV20MDT (Honda Tsushin)

52618–2011 (Molex Japan)
Vertical–type
Connectors These board–mounted connectors have been specially developed to
achieve the high packing density required for FANUC products. As
explained in the following subsection, Honda PCR series connectors can
be used as cable connectors because the mating mechanism of the newly
developed connectors is compatible with that of the Honda PCR series
connectors. To support this specification extensively, many connector
manufacturers are now developing custom–tailored cable connectors.
(Note that these cables cannot be used with screw–fixing cable connector
housings.)

B.3.2 Models: PCR–E20MDK–SL–A (Honda Tsushin)(straight connector)

Straight and PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL (Honda Tsushin)
(right–angled connector)
Right–angled
Connectors (for Spring These connectors are used for the main and option boards of the i series.
and Screw–fixing As cable connectors, they are compatible with screw–fixing connector
Connector Housings) housings as well as the spring locking connector housings.

NOTE
The screw–fixing connector housings cannot be used with
the main and sub–CPU boards of the Series 18i–LNA.

250
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

B.4 Cable connectors consist of a connector main body and housing. The
models listed below are available. Those connectors not marked with an
CABLE asterisk are currently being mass–produced as manufacturer’s standard
CONNECTORS models. Those marked with an asterisk are produced according to custom
specifications by FANUC.

Use Type Manufacturer Connector Housing Applicable cable

model model outside diameter
Cable General Strand wire Honda PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA* f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
connector use press–mount
(MDI, type Hirose FI30–20S* FI–20–CV2* f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
IOLINK,
AMP, Fujitsu FCN–247J020 FCN–240C020 f 5.8mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
SPDL, –G/E –Y/S*
Molex 52622–2011* 52624–2015* f 6.2mmf (5.9 to 6.5)
etc.)
Strand wire Hirose FI30–20S* FI–20–CV7* f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
press– (Low screw–
mount type fixing housing)
Soldering Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
type
Hirose FI40–20S* FI–20–CV2* f 6.2mm (f5.5 to 6.5)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV5* f 9.2mm (f8.9 to 9.5)
(FI40A–20S*)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* f 10.25mm (f9.5 to 11.0)

For Soldering Hirose FI40B–2015S* FI–20–CV* f 8.5mm (f8.0 to 9.0)

pulse coder, type (FI40–2015S*)
coaxial FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV5* f 9.2mm (f8.9 to 9.5)
cable, (FI40A–20S*)
linear scale,
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* f 10.25mm (f9.5 to 11.0)
manual pulse
generator, Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* f 6mm (f5.7 to 6.5)
etc.

Fig. B.4 Cable connectors

NOTE
The low screw–fixing housing (FI–20–CV7, manufactured
by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) cannot be used with the main
CPU board and sub–CPU board of the Series 18i–LNA.

251
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02

Cable Connectors Strand wire press–mount connector :

With this connector, #28AWG wires are
press–connected to each pin at the same time.
The cost of producing a cable/connector
assembly with this connector model is much
lower than with connectors designed for
crimping or soldering.
Also, the following connector housing has
been newly developed for use with the i
series.
Connector model (manufacturer) Supplementary description

FI–20–CV7 (Hirose) Low connector housing, more compact than conventional models. The housing
can be fastened to a board–mounted connector by means of a screw lock. It is
intended mainly for connecting the board–mounted connectors used on the main
and option boards of the LCD–mounted type i series (see Section B.3.2). This
cannot be used in the Series 18i–LNA.

Soldering type connector : Details of soldering type connectors and their

housings are summarized below.
Table B.4 Details of soldering type connectors and housings
D Connectors
Connector model (manufacturer) Supplementary description

PCR–E20FS (Honda) Soldering type connector for general signals. This is suitable for producing cable
assemblies in small quantities, as well as on–site.

FI40–20S (Hirose) Equivalent to Honda PCR–E20FS

FI40B–20S (Hirose) Has the same number of pins as the FI40–20S, but features a wider soldering pitch,
(formerly, FI40A–20S) facilitating soldering and enabling the use of thicker wires. Its reinforced pins allow
wires as thick as #17AWG to be soldered to the FI40B–20S (wires no thicker than
#20AWG can be used with the FI40A–20S). Note, however, that a thick wire, such
as #17AWG, should be used with a more robust housing like the FI–20–CV6.

FI40B–2015S (Hirose) Features a wider soldering pitch, attained by using the space provided by thinning
(formerly, FI40–2015S) out some pins. Also features tougher pins, compared with its predecessor, the
FI40–2015S. These pins can be soldered to wires as thick as #17AWG, provided
that the cable diameter does not exceed 8.5 mm.

D Housings
Housing model (manufacturer) Supplementary description

FI–20–CV5 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This is a plastic housing designed for use with
a cable that is 9.2 mm in diameter.

FI–20–CV6 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This housing, however, can be used with a
thicker cable (such as 10.25 mm) than is possible with the FI–20–CV5. Its
components are die cast.

In addition to the combinations shown in Fig. B.4, Hirose soldering–type

connectors can be combined with the housings listed below. Ensure that
the diameter of the cable used with each housing satisfies the
requirements of that housing.

252
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Connector model Housing model

(applicable cable diameter)

D FI40B–2015S FI–20–CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only

(formerly FI40–2015S)

D FI40–20S FI–20–CV2 (f6.2mm) Those listed

FI40B–20S FI–20–CV5 (f9.2mm) on the left
(formerly FI40A–20S) can be
FI–20–CV6 (f10.25mm) used.

253
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02

B.5
RECOMMENDED
CONNECTORS,
APPLICABLE
HOUSINGS, AND
CABLES
Table B.5 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables

Connector name FANUC–approved FANUC–approved Compatible cable (cable diameter) Remark

referenced in the connector housing FANUC development
Connection (manufacturer) (manufacturer) FANUC specification number
Manual

PCR–E20FA PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA A66L–0001–0284#10P Plastic housing

Strand (Honda Tsushin) (Honda Tsushin) (6.2 mm in diameter)
press–mount type A66L–0001–0284#10P
FI30–20S FI–20–CV2 Plastic housing
(6.2 mm in diameter)
(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0284#10P
FCN–247J020–G/E FCN–240C020–Y/S (6.2 mm in diameter) Plastic housing
(Fujitsu Takamizawa) (Fujitsu Takamizawa)

52622–2011 52624–2015 Plastic housing

(Molex) (Molex)

PCR–E20FA FI30–20S FI–20–CV7 Plastic housing

Strand wire (Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)
press–mount type

PCR–E20FS PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA Plastic housing

Soldering type (Honda Tsushin) (Honda Tsushin)

FI40–20S FI–20–CV2 Plastic housing

(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)

FI40B–2015S FI40B–2015S FI–20–CV A66L–0001–0286 (*1)

(formerly (formerly (Hirose Electric) A66L–0001–0402 (*1) Plastic housing
FI40–2015S) FI40–2015S) (8.5 mm in diameter)
15–pin soldering (Hirose Electric)
type

FI40B–20S FI40B–20S FI–20–CV5 A66L–0001–0367 Plastic housing

(formerly (formerly FI40–20S) (Hirose Electric) A66L–0001–0368
FI40–2015S) (Hirose Electric) (9.2 mm in diameter)
soldering type
FI40B–20S FI–20–CV6 A66L–0001–0403 (*1) Metal housing
(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric) (9.8 mm in diameter)

NOTE
*1 Cable A66L–0001–0286 has been recommended for use as a pulse coder cable. It can be
up to 20 m long. Two cables, A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403, have recently been
developed. A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403 can be as long as 30 m and 50 m,
respectively. (See Fig. 4 for detailed specifications.)
Both cables have the same level of oil and bending resistance (cable, 100 mm in diameter,
capable of withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles) as conventional cables, and are
UL– and CSA–certified.

254
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Press–mount type
connector assembly
tools and jigs
Connector model FANUC–approved Wire forming tool Press–mounting Remark
referenced in the connector tool
Connection Manual (manufacturer)

PCR–E20FA PCR–E20FA PCS–K2A FHPT–918A Low cost

(Honda Tsushin)
JGPS–015–1/1–20 MFC–K1 (Note 1)
JGPS–014 PCS–K1

FHAT–918A

FI30–20S FI30–20CAT FI30–20/ID Low cost

(Hirose Electric)
FI30–20CAT1 HHP–502
FI30–20GP

FCN–247J020–G/S FCN–237T–T043/H FCN–237T–T109/H

(Fujitsu) FCN–247T–T066/H
FCN–237T–T044/H

FCN–237T–T062/H

52622–2011 57829–5000 57830–5000 Low cost

(Molex)
57823–5000 57824–5000

NOTE
1 Those tools indicated by shading are available from FANUC (specification number
A02B–0120–K391).
2 The tools available from each manufacturer are specifically designed for use with the
connectors manufactured by that manufacturer.

255
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02

Materials for cable Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure the
assemblies materials for the cable assemblies to be used with their products. FANUC
recommends the following materials as being suitable for interface
connectors. Individual machine tool builders are encouraged to contact
each cable manufacturer for themselves, as required.

Material Use Constitution FANUC Manufacturer Remark

specification
number

10–pair cable General use 0.08mm2 A66L–0001–0284 Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

10–pair #10P Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

12–conductor Pulse coder, 0.5mm2 A66L–0001–0286 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 20 m or less

composite cable linear scale, 6–conductor Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
manual pulse 0.18mm2
generator 3–pair

0.75mm2 A66L–0001–0402 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 30 m or less

6–conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 movable parts
3–pair

1.25mm2 A66L–0001–0403 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 50 m or less

6–conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 movable parts
3–pair

5–core coaxial CRT interface 5–conductor A66L–0001–0371 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 50 m or less
cable coaxial

256
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

10–pair cable (a) Specifications

Item Unit Specifications

Product No. – A66L–0001–0284#10P

Manufacturer – Hitachi Cable,Ltd.

Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.

Rating – 60°C 30V:UL2789

80°C 30V:UL80276

Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B–286)

Insulator – Cross–linked vinyl

Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire

Sheath – Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl

Number of pairs Pairs 10

Conductor Size AWG 28

Structure Conductors 7/0.127

/mm

Outside diameter mm 0.38

Insulator Thickness mm 0.1

Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm)

Outside diameter (approx.) mm 0.58

Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C, 30V)

Twisted pair Outside diameter (approx.) mm 1.16

Pitch mm 20 or less

Lay – Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, then
wrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,
apply a cable separator as required.

Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5

Drain wire Conductors Hitachi Cable : Not available

/mm Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12

Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12

Braid density % 85 or more

Sheath Color – Black

Thickness mm 1.0

Outside diameter (approx.) mm 6.2

Standard length m 200

Packing method – Bundle

Electrical Electric resistance (at 20°C) Ω/km 233 or less

performance
Insulation resistance (at 20°C) MΩ–km 10 or less

Dielectricstrength (AC) V/min. 300

Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.

257
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02

(b) Cable structure

Wire identification table (Hitachi)

Insulator color
Wire No. First Second
wire wire
1
Twisted 1 Blue White
10 2 pair wire
2 Yellow White
5
Binding 3 Green White
9 3 tape
4 Red White
6 Shield
braid 5 Purple White
8 4
Sheath 6 Blue Brown
7
7 Yellow Brown
8 Green Brown
9 Red Brown
10 Purple Brown

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.

Fig. B.5 (a) Cable made by Hitachi Cable

Wire identification table (Oki)

Insulator color
Dot mark

Dot mark
color
Pair No.

Drain (1 pitch) First Second

wire wire wire

1 1 Orange – Red Black

Twisted
10 2 –pair 2 Gray – Red Black
wire
6 3 white – Red Black
Binding
9 3 tape
4 Yellow – Red Black
7 Shield
braid
5 Pink – Red Black
8 4
Sheath
6 Orange – – Red Black
5
7 Gray – – Red Black
8 White – – Red Black

9 Yellow – – Red Black

10 Pink – – Red Black

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.

Fig. B.5 (b) Cable made by Oki Electric Cable

258
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Composite 12–core (a) Specifications

cable
Item Unit Specifications

Product No. – A66L–0001–0286

Manufacturer – Oki Cable, Ltd.

Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

Rating – 80°C, 30V

Material Conductor,braid–shielded – Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C3152)

wire,drain wire

Insulator – Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl

Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinyl

Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)

Conductor Size mm2 0.5 0.18

Structure Conductors 20/0.18 7/0.18

/mm

Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54

Insulator Standard thickness (The mm 0.25 0.2

minimum thickness is at least
80% of the standard thickness.)

Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94

Twisted pair Outside diameter mm 1.88

Direction of lay – Left

Pitch mm 20 or less

Lay – Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer

is right–twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer.
Apply a cable separator as required.

Lay diameter mm 5.7

Drain wire Size mm2 0.3

Structure Wires/mm 12/0.18

Outside diameter mm 0.72

Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12

Thickness mm 0.3

Braid density % 70

Outside diameter mm 6.3

259
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02

Item Unit Specifications

Sheath Color – Black

Standard thickness (The mm 1.1

minimum thickness is at least
85% of the standard thickness.)

Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0(1)

Standard length m 100

Packing method – Bundle

Electrical Electric resistance (at 20°C) Ω/km 39.4(1 to 6) 113(7 to 9)

performance (wire nos.)

Insulation resistance (at 20°C) MΩ–km 15

Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500

Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards,

NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other
than the drain wire.

(b) Cable structure

The cable structure is shown below.

Drain wire
Red
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
7
6 White 1
Red Black 0.5–mm2 insulated wire

Red Binding tape

5 2
Red
8 black
Black Shield braid
4 3
Red Black black Sheath
9
White

The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.

260
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

(c) Specifications
Item Specification

FANUC specification number A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403

Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

A–conductor B–conductor A–conductor B–conductor

Conductor Constitution 16/0.12 3/22/0.12 16/0.12 7/16/0.12

Number of conductors/mm (0.18mm2) (0.75mm2) (0.18mm2) (1.25mm2)

Typical outside diameter 0.55 1.20 0.55 1.70

(mm)

Insulation Color White, red, black Red, black White, red, black Red, black
(polyester)
Typical thickness (mm) 0.16 0.23 0.16 0.25

Typical outside diameter 0.87 1.66 0.87 2.20

(mm)

Pair twisting Constitution White–red, White–red,

white–black, and white–black, and
black–red black–red

Direction of twisting Left Left

Typical pitch: Typical pitch:
20 mm 20 mm

Assembling Number of strands or 3 6 3 6

by twisting conductors

Direction of twisting Left Left

Taping Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Twisting is wrapped with washi, or

Japanese paper, tape. Japanese paper, tape.

Typical outside diameter 5.7 6.9

(mm)

Braided Typical strand diameter 0.14

shielding (mm)

Typical density (mm) 80

Drain A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding.

Typical outside diameter 6.4 7.6

(mm)

Sheath Color Black (matted)

(polyurethane)
Typical thickness (mm) 1.05 1.1

Vertical taping Vertically taped with washi under sheathing.

Outside diameter (mm) 8.5"0.3 9.8"0.3

Finished Typical length (m) 100

assembly
Short size Basically not approved.

261
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02

Item Specification

FANUC specification number A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403

Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

A–conductor B–conductor A–conductor B–conductor

Finished Rating 80_C 30V

assembly
performance Standard Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80°C 30V
FT–1.

Flame resistance Shall comply with VW–1 and FT–1.

Electrical Conductor resistance 103 or lower 25.5 or lower 103 or lower 15.0 or lower
performance Ω/km (20°C)

Insulation resistance 1 or higher

MΩ/km (20°C)

Dielectric strength A. C 500

V–min

Insulation Tensile strength 9.8 or higher

performance N/mm2

Elongation % 100 or higher

Tensile strength after aging At least 70% of that before aging

%

Elongation after aging % At least 65% of that before aging

Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C

Sheathing Tensile strength 9.8 or higher

performance N/mm2

Elongation % 100 or higher

Tensile strength after aging At least 70% of that before aging

%

Elongation after aging % At least 65% of that before aging

Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C

Cable cross
section Tape Braided shielding

ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅWhite Red Twisted pair A

ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Red
Black

ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Red Black Red Black

ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Solid wire B

ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
White Black
Black
Red

ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Drain

Sheath

262
B–63393EN/02 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

5–core coaxial cable

D Specifications Item Unit Description

Specification – A66L–0001–0371
Manufacture – HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.
Manufacture’s specification – CO–IREFV(0)–CX–75–SB5X0.14SQ
Number of Conductors Core 5
Inside Con- Size mm2 0.14
ductor
Components Conduc- 7/0.16
tors
(PCS)/m
m
Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire
Diameter mm 0.48
Insulator Material (Color) – Polyethylene (White)
Thickness mm 0.71
Diameter mm 1.90
Outside Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)
Conductor
Diameter of Com- mm 0.08
ponent–Wire
Density % 95 or more
Diameter mm 0.2
Jacket Material – Vinyl
Color – Black. White. Red. Green. Blue
Thickness mm 0.15
Diameter mm 2.6
Twisted Assembly Diameter mm 7.1
Thickness of Paper Tape mm 0.05
Shield Wire dia. Material mm 0.12
braid Tin–coaded soft copper wire
Density % 80 or more
Thickness mm 0.3
Diameter mm 7.8
Sheath Material, Color – Oil Tight Vinyl Black
Thickness mm 0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56)
Finish Diameter mm 9.2 "0.3
Conductor Resistance (20°C) W/km 143 or less
Withstand Voltage (A.C.) V/min. 1000
Insulation Resistance (20°C) MW–km 1000 or more
Impedance (10MHz) W 75±5
Standard Capacitance (1MHz) nF/km 56
Standard Attention (10MHz) dB/km 53
Weight kg/km 105
Standard Length m 200
Package form – Bundle

263
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63393EN/02

Red
Red

Black Green
Green
Black

White Blue
White Blue

An example of circuit testing 20–pin interface cable

.
.
.

Ω
Resistor

Check .
every pin .
.

Cable (20–pin interface connector)

PCB connector PCR–E20LMD (Honda)

264
B–63393EN/02 C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)

C CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)

Maximum allowable cable length between units

Maximum
Cable type Use and condition cable length
(m)

I/O Link cable Electrical cable 10 m Note 2

Serial spindle cable Electrical cable (CNC to SPM) 20 m

MPG cable I/O module for operator’s 50 m

panel–to–manual pulse generator

FSSB cable See APPENDIX D.

HSSB cable See APPENDIX D.

NOTE
1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply only when
the respective recommended cables stated in the text are
used. If a non–recommended cable is used, the maximum
cable length may not be guaranteed.
2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is used within
the cabinet.

265
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) B–63393EN/02

Purpose Description Specification Length

Manual pulse
generator cable
(for one unit)
Connector FI40–2015S A02B–
operator’s panel
0120– 7m
I/O module (JA3)
K847
á M3 crimp style terminal
Manual pulse
generator terminal
board

I/O Link cable

A02B–
Control unit (JD1A)
0120– 5m
á
K842
I/O unit (JD1B) PCR–E20FA

M3 crimp style terminal

Control unit power
supply cable
A02B–
Stabilized power
0124– 5m
supply (24 VDC)
K830
á
Control unit (CP1) AMP1–178288–3

Serial spindle
signal cable
A02B–
Control unit (JA41)
0236– 5m
á
K810
a series amplifier PCR–E20FA
(JA7B)

266
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE

D OPTICAL CABLE

The Series 18i–LNA uses optical cables for the following interfaces. This
table lists the usable combinations.
Interface Recommended Maximum allowable Applicable junc- Remark
optical cable transmission distance tion adapter

Serial spindle interface A66L–6001–0026#L~ 200 m A63L–0020–0002

High–speed serial bus A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None

(HSSB) interface (Note)
A66L–6001–0029#L~ 55 m A63L–0020–0004 For junction only

Serial servo bus (FSSB) A66L–6001–0023#L~ 10 m None

interface
A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None

NOTE
For printed–circuit boards with the following former ordering
information, the maximum allowable transmission distance
with –0026#L~ is lowered to 50 m, and connection with
A63L–0020–0004 is impossible.
·A20B–8001–0580 ·A20B–8001–0581
·A20B–8001–0640 ·A20B–8100–0100

267
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02

Notes on the (1) Supported optical cables

specifications of optical (a) Internal cord type cable: A66L–6001–0023#LjRjjj
cable C Cable length: 0.15 to 10 m
Code diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cords
Tensile strength:
optical cord 7 kg per cord
Between optical cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical cord: 25 mm
Operating temperature: –20 to 70°C

Unit: mm
7

6.7 14 max. 100 typ. Two cords are bound together.

21

Code

Fig. D.1 External dimensions of internal cord type cable

(b) External type cable: A66L–6001–0026#LjRjjj
A66L–6001–0029#LjRjjj
Cable length: 1 to 200 m
optical cord diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cords
Diameter of cable with reinforced cover: 7.6 mm
Tensile strength: Cable with reinforced cover – 75 kg
optical cord 7 kg per cord
Between optical cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical cord: 25 mm
Minimum bending radius of cable with reinforced cover: 50 mm
Bending resistance (cable with reinforced cover):
10 million bending cycles at room temperature
(when the bending radius is 100 mm)

Flame resistance: Equivalent to UL VW–1

Operating temperature: –20 to 70°C

Unit: mm

8.2

6.7 19 max. 150 typ. 35 typ.

21

Code Bush
Reinforced cover

Fig. D.2 External dimensions of external cable

268
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE

Table D.1 Standard cable length

Internal cord type cable External cable

A66L–6001–0023# A66L–6001–0026#

Specification Length Specification Length

L150R0 0.15 m L1R003 1.0 m

L300R0 0.3 m L2R003 2.0 m

L500R0 0.5 m L3R003 3.0 m

L1R003 1.0 m L5R003 5.0 m

L2R003 2.0 m L7R003 7.0 m

L3R003 3.0 m L10R03 10.0 m

L5R003 5.0 m L15R03 15.0 m

L7R003 7.0 m L20R03 20.0 m

L10R03 10.0 m L30R03 30.0 m

L50R03 50.0 m

L100R03 100.0 m

L200R03 200.0 m

2. Cable selection
D Always use an external cable (A66L–6001–0026#~) when the
cable is to be laid outside the power magnetics cabinet or main unit
cabinet, where it may be pulled, rubbed, or stepped on.
D Use an external cable when part of the cabling is to be subject to
movement. For example, when connecting a portable operation
pendant box to the power magnetics cabinet, the use of an external
cable is desirable because the cable is likely to be bent, pulled, or
twisted repeatedly even though frequent system operation is not
expected. However, the force likely to be applied when the cable
is installed or moved for maintenance purposes does not need to be
taken into consideration.
D Use an external cable in locations where sparks or flame are a danger.
Although the internal cord type cable (A66L–6001–0023#~) is
covered by nonflammable resin, the cover, if exposed to frame for
a long time, may melt, allowing the fiber cable inside to burn.
D Use an external cable when the cable is expected to be pulled with
considerable force during installation (the force applied to the cable
must be within the specified tensile strength limit at all times). For
example, even though installing a cable in a cable duct can be
regarded as internal cabling, a cable of the appropriate type must
be selected according to the tensile force to be applied to the cable
during installation.
D Both the internal cord type and external cables have the same oil
and heat resistance properties.

269
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02

3. Procuring the cable

All the optical cables mentioned above are special cable products with
optical connectors, which are designed, produced, and tested to ensure
the required system performance and reliability. It is technically
impossible for users to produce these cables or process (cut and
reconnect) them after purchase. Users are requested to purchase cables
of the necessary length from an appropriate supplier. Cables are
available from either FANUC or any of the FANUC–approved
manufacturers listed in Table D.2.
Table D.2 FANUC–approved cable manufacturers and cable model
numbers (retail)
(1) Internal cord type cable A66L–6001–0023#LjRjjj
Manufacturer Model number Remarks

Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. :–353373–:

Japan Aviation Electronics PF–2HB209–::M–F–1 :: indicates the

Industry, Ltd. cable length (m).

Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07–P22–F2VCFA–:: :: indicates the

cable length (m).

(2) External Cable A66L–6001–0026#LjRjjj

Manufacturer Model number Remarks

Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. :–353199–:

Japan Aviation Electronics CF–2HB208–::M–F–1 :: indicates the

Industry, Ltd. cable length (m).

Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07–P22–F2NCFA–:: :: indicates the

cable length (m).

Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. OPC201HPXF–::MB :: indicates the

cable length (m).

4. Handling precautions
(1) Protection during storage
When the electrical/optical conversion module mounted on the
printed circuit board and the optical cable are not in use, their
mating surfaces must be protected with the lid and caps with which
they are supplied. If left uncovered, the mating surfaces are likely
to become dirty, possibly resulting in a poor cable connection.

270
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE

Electrical/optical conversion module Lid

optical cable
optical cable caps

Fig. D.3 Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical cable (when not in use)

(2) optical cable

• Make sure that the bending radius and tensile strength of the cable
are always within their ranges described in the specifications (see
the first item), regardless of whether the cable is stored or routed
and whether operation is in progress or not.
• Although the reinforcing cover of the external cable has sufficient
mechanical strength, be careful not to drop heavy objects on the
cable.
• Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting or
disconnecting the cable. Do not pull on the optical cord itself. (The
maximum tensile strength between the optical cord and connector
is 2 kg. Applying greater force to the cord is likely to cause the
connector to come off, making the cable unusable.)
• Once connected, the optical connector is automatically locked by
the lock levers on its top. To remove the connector, release the lock
levers and pull the connector.
• Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other than the
correct orientation, always take note of the connector’s orientation
before making the connection.
• Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a hook or
a tension member to the reinforcing cover of the optical connector
and pull the wire or tension member, as shown in Fig. D.4. This
is done to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the
optical cord and connector. If no tensile force is applied between
the optical cord and connector when installing the cable, you can
hold the reinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. In
the case of an internal cord, which does not have a reinforcing
cover, apply the same protective measures, as instructed in Fig.
D.4, for that portion of the cable where the two cords are bound
together, in order to prevent a tensile force from being applied
between the optical cord and connector. In the same way as for an
external cable, if no tensile force is applied between the optical cord
and connector during installation, you can hold the shielded part of

271
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02

the cable directly and pull it. Because the combined tensile
strength of the two cords is only 14 kg, however, avoid applying
too great a force to the cable during installation, regardless of
whether you have taken the protective measures.

Optical connector
Reinforcing cover Optical connector

Reinforcing cover Wire with a hook

Tension member

Tape Tape

2 cords combined

Fig. D.4 Prior to installing a cable

D Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable side and
PCB side) clean. If they become dirty, wipe them with tissue paper or
absorbent cotton to remove dirt. The tissue paper or absorbent cotton
may be moistened with ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solvent
other than ethyl alcohol.
D Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord binding
portion of the internal cord type cable by using a cable clamp, as
shown in Fig. D.5, to prevent the weight of the optical cable from
being applied directly to the connecting part of the optical
connector.
(Recommended cable clamp):
Recommended cable clamps are listed below. Use a clamp
that grasps the optical cable lightly; the clamp should not
apply excessive pressure to the cable.
For an external cable:
CKN–13SP (with sponge)(Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
For an internal cord type cable:
MN–1 (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)

272
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE

Reinforcing cover of external

Optical connector Optical cord cable or cord binding portion of
internal cord type cable

Bending radius of 25 mm or more

(Make the bending radius as large as
possible.)
Bending radius of 50 mm or more (for reinforcing cover)
Cable clamp Bending radius of 25 mm or more (for cord binding portion)
(Make the bending radius as large as possible.)

Fig. D.5 Fixing the cable with a clamp

D Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into a loops.
Should this prove necessary, make sure the diameter of each loop
is at least 150 mm (for an external cable) or at least 100 mm (for
an internal cord type cable). Winding the cable into smaller loops
may produce sharp curves that exceed the specified bending radius
limit without the user being aware. Such bending can result in a
greater transmission loss, ultimately leading to a communication
failure.
D When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp, follow the
instructions given below. Also, take care not to apply a bending
force to one particular part of the cable when fixing it with a clamp.
Failing to clamp the cable correctly may cut or damage it.
External cable:
Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a nylon band.
When clamping the cable by the reinforcing cover, the clamping
force is not an important factor to consider. However, ensure that
the clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that the
reinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping. If possible, the
clamping force should be 5 kg or less.
Internal cord type cable:
Lightly clamp the optical cable with a nylon band so that the cable
shield is not deformed. If possible, the clamping force should be
1 or 2 kg (make sure that no force is applied to the cable). Due care
is required when clamping the internal cord type cable because its
cable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the external
cable.

273
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02

5. Optical cable relay of FANUC I/O Link

When used for the FANUC I/O Link application, optical cables can be
connected by using an optical cable adapter, as follows.
(a) External view of an optical cable adapter

32"0.3

10.16
R1.6

6.6
8.2
21"0.5

3.2 42"0.5

18.2"0.5
2.2

(b) Example of the use of an optical cable adapter

Optical cable adapter (A63L–0020–0002)

Optical cable Optical cable

Mounting board

NOTE
Up to one relay points are permitte.

274
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE

6. Optical cable relay of FANUC high–speed serial bus

With the FANUC high–speed serial bus, special low–loss optical
cables can be connected by using a special low–loss optical relay
adapter as an optical cable relay adapter.
(a) External view of the low–loss optical relay adapter

32"0.5
10.16
R1.6

6.6
8.2
21"0.3
3.2 42"1.0

18.1
2.2

(b) Example of use of the optical cable relay adapter

Low–loss optical relay adapter (A63L–0020–0004)

Low–loss optical cable Low–loss optical cable

Mounting board

NOTE
Only one relay point is permitted.

275
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02

7. Precautions for connection with low–loss optical junction adapter

D Features of and handling precautions for low–loss optical junction
adapter (A63L–0020–0004)
When optical connectors for a conventional optical junction
adapter (A63L–0020–0002) are jointed, the facing ferrules(Note 1)
are located about 60 um from each other. This is because the optical
cable of conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cables
(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) may protrude from the tip of
the ferrules (by up to about several um), resulting in the cable
protrusion being damaged when the ferrules are butted against each
other.
In the low–loss optical junction adapter, the ferrules are butted
against each other, thus greatly reducing the reduction in repeater
loss. Therefore, the two optical cables used with the low–loss
optical junction adapters must be dedicated to the adapters.
If a conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cable
(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) is used as even one of the two
optical cables for joining the low–loss optical junction adapter,
both cables may be damaged, resulting in deteriorated
characteristics.

NOTE
Ferrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical connector; the
fiber is bonded to the ferrule.

Ferrule
Protective cover

Optical cable
Optical connector

D Features of low–loss optical cable (A66L–6001–0029)

A low–loss optical cable is selected from conventional PCF optical
cables (A66L–6601–0026). The selected cable offers low loss, and
its connector section is given special treatment; the cable ends are
provided with a depression so that the ferrules can be butted against
each other. The two optical cables used with the low-loss optical
junction adapter must be of low–loss type.
D Appearance of the low–loss optical junction adapter and cable
(how to distinguish them from conventional types)
The body of the conventional optical junction adapter is black, but
that of the low–loss optical junction adapter is blue. In addition,
the protective cover(Note 1) of the conventional PCF optical cable
is black, but that of the low–loss optical cable is blue.

276
B–63393EN/02 D. OPTICAL CABLE

8. Installing the optical cable junction adapter

The optical cable junction adapter should be installed within a cabinet,
as a rule. If it is impossible to avoid installing it within a cabinet,
protect the adapter and the optical cable portions (such as connectors
and cords) not covered with reinforcement coating from the outside air
by, for example, covering them with packing.

9. Environmental resistance of the optical cable junction adapter

D The optical cable junction adapter is not waterproof. Even when
optical cables are attached to both ends of the adapter, there are very
small gaps in the linked portions, so water resistance can not be
expected.
D When optical cables are attached to both ends of the junction
adapter installed in a normal environment (such as within a
cabinet), it is unlikely that dust will penetrate between the adapter
and optical cable to the degree that it may hamper normal optical
linkage. If one or both ends of the adapter are left open, dust and
dirt may accumulate even when the adapter is in a normal
environment (such as within a cabinet). The dust and dirt on the
adapter ends is likely to hamper normal optical linkage when the
optical cables are attached. In such a case, clean the junction
adapter and the optical connector using the optical cable junction
adapter cleaning method described below.
D Do not allow cutting fluid to splash over the adapter or those optical
cable portions (such as connectors and cords) that are not covered
with reinforcement coating. If the inside of the adapter and cable
end surfaces are contaminated with cutting fluid, a malfunction
may occur.

10.Cleaning
If the optical cable junction adapter, optical–to–electrical conversion
module, or optical cable are soiled, clean them according to the
following procedures.
D Cleaning the optical cable junction adapter and optical-to-electrical
conversion module
First, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistened
with, or by washing it in, ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B (alternative
CFC; High Shower spray can DS–2168, manufactured by Sun
Hayato). Similarly, wash the two sleeves in the adapter or wipe
them with a cotton swab or the like.

277
D. OPTICAL CABLE B–63393EN/02

D Cleaning optical cables

For the optical cables, it is important to clean the connectors at their
ends. Any soiling on the optical cable end surfaces will hamper
optical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe the optical
cable end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces) thoroughly with
a soft, clean cloth (like gauze) moistened with ethyl alcohol or
HCFC141B, in the same way as described above. The use of cotton
swabs may prove convenient. The fiber end surfaces of low–loss
optical cables are lower than the ferrules. To remove any soiling
from the cable end surfaces completely, push the cotton swab or
gauze into the depressions all the way through while rotating the
ferrule. If the ferrules and optical connectors are contaminated
with oily substances, and they may extend over a cleaned cable end
surface when it is attached to the optical-to-electrical conversion
module, it is a good idea to wash them before wiping the optical
cable end surfaces, using the procedure stated above.

278
 E. 10.4″ LCD UNIT (WITH TOUCH PANEL
B–63393EN/02 AND OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O)

10.4″ LCD UNIT (WITH TOUCH PANEL AND OPERATOR’S

E PANEL I/O)

LCD with a touch panel The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. For
touch panel operation, be sure to use the FANUC–supplied pen
(A02B–0236–K111) provided with the touch panel. If the LCD screen is
touched using a sharp–tipped pen, the surface of the LCD screen may be
damaged. Moreover, the LCD screen must not be touched by with your
fingers. Otherwise, the operability may be degraded, and the screen is
likely to become dirty.

Protection sheet for the A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel to
touch panel protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. If the protection sheet
is damaged, it can be replaced. (The protection sheet is a consumable
part.)

Replacing the protection

sheet
D Materials used 1) Protection sheet A02B–0236–K110
2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off = detergent
for kitchen can be used)
3) Soft cloth (such as towel)

D Replacement procedure 1) Before replacement

<1> Turn off the power to the machine.
<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the touch
panel.
<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with
alcohol.
<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface of the
touch panel.
<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
D If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still left on
the surface. Remove oil completely.
D If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch panel, the
protection sheet cannot adhere to the panel completely and
will sometimes peel off easily.
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.

2) Applying the protection sheet

<1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to the backing
sheet).

Fold

279
E. 10.4″ LCD UNIT (WITH TOUCH PANEL
AND OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O) B–63393EN/02

<2> Peel off the backing sheet.

<3> Position the sheet, then attach the upper and lower sides of the
sheet first. Check that the sides of the protection sheet do not
touch the escutcheon.

OK NG

<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet while
pushing out air between the touch panel and protection sheet.
D With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the touch
panel, do not attempt to correct the position of the protection
sheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the entire
sheet completely.
D Check that the four corners and four sides of the protection
sheet do not float.

3) Checks after replacement

<1> Check that there is no wrinkle on the surface of the protection
sheet.
<2> After power–on, check that there is no touch panel portion kept
pressed.
<3> Press the touch panel, and check that correct operation takes
place.

280
B–63393EN/02 F. PCMCIA INTERFACE

F PCMCIA INTERFACE

Overview Internal data of the CNC can be input and output through the PCMCIA
interface located on the left side of the 10.4–inch LCD unit (with a touch
panel and operator’s panel I/O). When a detachable LCD/MDI is used,
the PCMCIA interface in the controller is used.
As memory cards, flash ATA cards (those that can operate on 5 V) and
compact flash cards can be used.

ATA CARD 1. Overview

Flash ATA card (5 V version) can be used for data input/output.
Because the flash ATA card incorporates a storage device and
controller, it enables data input/output for a personal computer
equipped with a PCMCIA interface without using any special PC card
writer.

2. Flash ATA card specification

The Flash ATA card must comply with the following standards and
must be of one of the following types. However, it is not guaranteed
that all ATA cards that comply with these standards will operate
normally in the CNC. See Section 3 for those ATA cards whose
normal operation has been confirmed by FANUC.
2–1 Card standards
The ATA card to be used in the CNC must comply with PCMCIA
(Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) PC
Card standard Release 2.1 and PCMCIA PC Card ATA Release
1.02.
2–2 Card Shapes
PCMCIA Type I and Type II
2–3 Card Operation Mode
PC–ATA specification
2–4 Card Operating Voltage
ATA cards that can operate on 5 V (single voltage power source)
and 5 V/3.3 V (automatic switching) can be used in the CNC.

3. ATA cards whose normal operation has been confirmed

The following table lists those ATA cards whose normal operation has
been confirmed by FANUC (as of October, 2000).

281
F. PCMCIA INTERFACE B–63393EN/02

Manufacturer Model Storage capacity

Hitachi, Ltd. HB289016A4 16MB

HB289032A4 32MB

HB289048A4 48MB

Matsushita Electric BN–020AB 20MB

Industrial Co., Ltd.
BN–040AB 40MB

SanDisk SDP3B–20 20MB

SDP3B–40 40MB

NOTE
1 FANUC does not guarantee the normal operation of any
ATA card other than those listed above.
2 3.3 V versions of ATA cards cannot be used in the CNC.

4. Miscellaneous
D The flash ATA card uses a quick format.
If your flash ATA card has not been formatted, do so using a
personal computer.

Compact Flash cards Commercially available compact flash cards and compact flash card
adapters can be used.
The following tables list those compact flash cards and adapters of which
normal operation has been confirmed by FANUC.
Compact flash card adapters
Manufacturer Model

I·O DATA PCCF–ADP

SanDisk PC CARD ADAPTER

Compact flash cards

Manufacturer Model Storage capacity

Hitachi, Ltd. HB289016C4 16MB

SanDisk SDCFB–16–505 16MB

I·O DATA PCCF–15MS 16MB

Hagiwara Syscom HPC–CF16X 16MB

NOTE
FANUC does not guarantee normal operation when cards
not listed in the above table are used.

282
B–63393EN/02 Index
[Numbers] Connection Cable (Supplied from Us), 265
Connection Diagram, 96
10.4″ LCD Unit (with Touch Panel and Operator’s
Panel I/O), 279 Connection Example of Relay Pins, 98
2 A Output DO Signal Specifications, 114 Connection of a Manual Pulse Generator, 129
20–pin Interface Connectors and Cables, 249 Connection of AS–i terminal, 147
7 segments LED display, 157 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules, 117
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable, 79
Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Cable, 80
[A] Connection of FANUC I/O Link–AS–i Converter, 140
Action Against Noise, 21 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles, 70
Additional Target Model, 250 Connection of Operator’s Panel I/O Module, 133
An order of command handshake, 154 Connection of the Connector Panel, 93
Arrangement of connector, 142 Connection to CNC Peripherals, 43
AS–i status, 150 Connection to FANUC I/O Link, 76
Attaching/Detaching DeviceNet Board, 190 Connection with Input/Output Devices, 58
Connection with the 10.4″ LCD Unit (with the Touch
Panel and Operator’s Panel I/O), 45
[B] Connection with the Detachable LCD/MDI, 48
Connection with the LCD Unit, 44
Batteries, 40
Connector Layout, 121
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor
(6 VDC), 42 Connector Panel I/O Modules Used, 93
Battery for Memory Backup (3VDC), 40 Control Unit, 29
Board–mounted Connectors, 250 Control Unit Configuration and Component Names, 2
Cooling by Heat Exchanger, 18

[C]
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 26 [D]
Cable Connection, 213 Dealing with Errors, 159
Cable Connectors, 251 Design and Installation Conditions of the Machine
Tool Magnetic Cabinet, 16
Cable for Power Supply to Control Unit, 39
Details of command flag and status, 153
Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator, 136
Details of commands, 154
Cabling Diagram, 31
Details of I/O Link DI/DO, 149
CE Marking, 167
DeviceNet board, 184
Checking the Input and Output Signals, 116
DI/DO Map on the I/O Link, 148
Command Execution by the Ladder Program, 152
Command interface of ladder program, 152
Commands that can be executed from the ladder pro-
gram, 152
[E]
Configuration, 1 Emergency Stop Signal, 168
Environment for Installation, 14
Configurations of Stand–alone Type Control Units, 2
Environmental conditions, 141, 186
Connecting Input power source, 146
Environmental Requirements, 14
Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit,
24 Error code, 153
Connecting the Servo Check Adapter, 74 External Dimensions of Each Unit and Connector, 217
Connection, 78, 145, 179, 188 External View, 137

i–1
 Index B–63393EN/02

[M]
M–NET Board, 210
[F] Manual Pulse Generator Connection, 135
Miscellaneous, 209
FL–net Board, 192
Monitoring Participating and Separated Nodes, 195

[G] [N]
General connection diagram, 145 Noise Suppressor, 25
Ground, 23 Normal operation, 162

[H] [O]
Handling Precautions, 175 Operator’s Panel I/O Connection for 10.4″ LCD Unit,
121
Hardware Overview, 8 Optical Fiber Cable, 267
Heat Output of Each Unit, 19 Ordering specification, 140
Heat value, 140 Other Notes, 118, 132, 139
High–speed Serial Bus (HSSB), 171 Outer dimensions, 141
How to use I/O Link – AS–i Converter, 161 Outline, 140
Outline Drawing, 115
Output Signal Connection, 127
[I] Output signal connection, 109
Overall Connection Diagram, 122, 133
I/O Connection of the Series 18i–LNA, 84
I/O Connector Pin Assignment, 124
I/O Link Assignment, 99, 123 [P]
input / output data area, 149 PCMCIA Interface, 281
Input Signal Connection, 125 Personal Computer Specification, 173
Input signal connection, 103 Pin assignment, 101
Input/Output Signal Specifications, 112 PLC Board Connector Layout, 178
Installation, 13, 141, 142, 161 PLC Interface Board, 176
Installation Environment, 173 Power Connection, 134

Installing the Control Unit, 29 Power supply, 140

Power Supply Capacities of CNC–related Units, 15
Interface Connector, 212
Power Supply Capacity, 15
Interface to the Servo Amplifiers, 73
Power Supply Connection, 32, 97
Power supply connection, 123
Power Supply for the Control Unit, 34
[L] Power turn–on/off sequence, 146
LED display, 157 Power–off Sequence, 38
LED Display and Setting Switch Operation, 156 Power–on Sequence, 37
List of slave, 151 Procedure for Installing Personal Computer Interface
Boards, 174

i–2
B–63393EN/02 Index

[R] [T]
Recommended Cables, 175 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet, 18
Recommended Connectors, Applicable Housings, and Thermal Design of Operator’s Panel, 20
Cables, 254
Thermal Design of the Cabinet, 18
Refresh time, 189
Total Connection Diagrams, 9
RS–232–C Interface Specification, 60
Turning On and Off the Power to the Control Unit, 34
RS–232–C Serial Port, 58

[U]
[S]
Units that Can be Connected Using FANUC I/O Link,
Separating Signal Lines, 21 83
Serial Spindle, 70
Servo Interface, 72, 73
Setting switch, 158 [V]
Signal Connections, 101 Vertical–type Connectors, 250
Slave and master functions, 186
Specification, 140
Specifications, 131, 138, 185, 194 [W]
Specifications and Circuit Configuration of External Weight, 140
24–VDC Power Supply, 34
When the 10.4″ LCD Unit (with Touch Panel and Op-
Spindle Connection, 69 erator’s Panel I/O) is Used, 10
Straight and Right–angled Connectors (for Spring and When the Detachable LCD/MDI is Used, 12
Screw–fixing Connector Housings), 250
Wiring Inside the Operator’s Panel, 128
Strong point, 140

i–3
 Revision Record

FANUC Series 18i–LNA CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B–63393EN)

Addition of following items :

D Connection of the connector panel
D Connection of I/O Link–AS–i converter
02 Feb.,2001
D FL–net board
D M–NET board
Correction of errors

01 Mar., 2000

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.